Recordofbuddhist 00 Fahsuoft

FA-HIEN'S RECORD
OF
BUDDHISTIC KINGDOMS
LEGGE
HENRY FROWDE
Oxford University Press Warehouse
Amen Corner, E.C.

VI. THK DEVAS CELEBRATING THE ATTAINMENT OF THE BUDDHASHIP. Ch. 31,
V 3
RECORD OF BUDDHISTIC KINGDOMS

BEING AS ACCOUNT BY
THE CHINESE MONK FA-HIEN

OF
HIS TRAVELS IN INDIA AND CEYLON

(A.D. 399-414)
IN SEARCH OF THE BUDDHIST BOOKS OF DISCIPLINE
TRANSLATED AND ANNOTATED

WITH A COREAN RECENSION OF THE CHINESE TEXT
BY
JAMES LEGGE, M.A., LL.D.

PROFESSOR OF THE CHINESE LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE
©rforD
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
1886
[ AH rights reserved ]
PS
^r -
CONTENTS.
PREFACE
INTRODUCTION.
Life of Fa-hien; genuineness and integrity of the text of his
narrative; number of the adherents of Buddhism . . . i
CHAPTER I.
From Ch'ang-gan to the Sandy Desert 9
CHAPTER II.
On to Shen-shen and thence to Khoten la
CHAPTER III.
Khoten. Processions of images. The king's New monastery . . 16
CHAPTER IV.
Through the Ts'ung or 'Onion' mountains to K'eeh-ch'a ; probably
Skardo, or some city more to the East in Ladak. . . .21
CHAPTER V.
Great quinquennial assembly of monks. Relics of Buddha. Pro-
ductions of the country 22
CHAPTER VI.
On TOWARDS North India. Darada. Image of MaitreyaBodhisattva. 24
CHAPTER VII.
Crossing of the Indus. When Buddhism first crossed that river
for the East 26
vi CONTENTS.
CHAPTER VIII.
WOO-CHANG, OR UdVANA. MONASTERIES AND THEIR WAYS. TRACES OF
Buddha 28
CHAPTER IX.
Soo-HO-TO. Legend of Buddha 30
CHAPTER X.
Gandh.\ra. Legends of Buddha 31
CHAPTER XI.
Takshaîla. Legends. The four gre.\t topes 32
CHAPTER XII.
Purushapura, or Peshawur. Prophecy about king Kanishka and
HIS tope. Buddha's alms-bowl. Death of Hwuy-ying • 53
CHAPTER XIII.
Nagara. Festival of Buddha's skull-bone. Other relics, and his
SHADOW 36
CHAPTER XIV.
Death of Hwuy-king in the Little Snowy mountains. Lo-e. Pohna.
Crossing the Indus to the East 40
CHAPTER XV.
Bhida. Sympathy of monks with the pilgrims 41
CHAPTER XVI.
On to MathurA, or Muttra. Condition and customs of Central
India of the monks, viharas, and monasteries
;
.... 42
CHAPTER XVII.
Sanka^ya. Buddha's ascent to and descent from the Trayastrimâs
heaven, and other legends 47
CHAPTER XVIII.
Kanyakubja, or Canouge. Buddha's preaching S3
CHAPTER XIX.
Sha-che. Legend of Buddh.Vs Danta-kashtha 54
CONTENTS. vii
PAGE
CHAPTER XX.
KosALA AND SrAvastL The Jetavaxa vihara and other memorials axd
LEGENDS OF BUDDHA. SYMPATHY OF THE MONKS WITH THE PILGRIMS. 55
CHAPTER XXI.
The THREE PREDECESSORS OF SAKVAMUNI IN THE BUDDHASHIP . . 63
CHAPTER XXII.
Kapilavastu. Its desolation. Legends of Buddha's birth, and other
incidents in connexion with it 64
CHAPTER XXIII.
Rama, and its tope 68
CHAPTER XXIV.
Where Buddha finally renounced the world, and where he died . 70
CHAPTER XXV.
VaiâlI. The tope called 'Weapons l.\id down.' The Council of
Vaiâl! 72
CHAPTER XXVI.
Remarkable death of Ananda 75
CHAPTER XXVII.
Pataliputtra, or Patna, in Magadha. King Anoka's spirit-built
palace and halls. The Buddhist Brahman, Radhasami. Dis-
pensaries and hospitals 77
CHAPTER XXVIII.
Rajagriha, New and Old. Legends and incidents connected with it . 80
CHAPTER XXIX.
Gridhra-kOta hill, and legends. Fa-hien passes a night on it. His
reflections 82
CHAPTER XXX.
The Srataparna cave, or cave of the First Council. Legends.
Suicide of a Bhikshu 84
viii CONTENTS.
PAGE
CHAPTER XXXr.
GaYA. SaKYAMUNI'S attaining to the BUDDHASHIP ; AND OTHER LEGENDS . 87
CHAPTER XXXn.
Legend of king Aôka in a former birth, and his naraka . . 90
CHAPTER XXXni.
Mount Gurupada, where Ka§yapa Buddha's entire skeleton is . 92
CHAPTER XXXIV.
On the way back to Patna. VARANASt, or Benares, âkyamuni's
first doings after becoming Buddha 93
CHAPTER XXXV.
Dakshina, and the pigeon monastery 96
CHAPTER XXXVI.
In Patna. Fa-hien's labours in transcription of manuscripts, and
Indian studies for three years 98
CHAPTER XXXVII.
To Champa and TAsL^LiPTt. Stay and labours there for three
YEARS. Takes ship to Singhala, or Ceylon 100
CHAPTER XXXVIII.
At Ceylon. Rise of the kingdom. Feats of Buddha. Topes and
monasteries. Statue of Buddha in jade. Bo tree. Festival of
Buddh.Vs tooth lOI
CHAPTER XXXIX.
Cremation of an Arhat. Sermon of a devotee 107
CHAPTER XL.
After two years takes ship for China. Disastrous passage to Java ;
and thence to China arrives at Shan-tung and goes to

; ;
Nanking. Conclusion or l'envoi by another writer .111

. .
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS, &c.
Sketch map of Fa-hien's travels . . . To face Introduction, page i
I.
Dream of Buddha's mother of his incarnation . . . To face p. 65
II.
Buddha just born, with the nagas supplying water to

wash him To face p. 67
III.
Buddha tossing the white elephant over the wall . . To face p. 66
IV.
Buddha in solitude and enduring austerities . . . To face p. iy
V.
Buddhaship attained To face p. 88
VI.
The devas celebrating the attainment of the Buddhaship . To face the Title
VII.
Buddha's dying instructions To face p. 70
VIII.
Buddha's death To follow V\\
IX.
Division of Buddha's relics To followVWl
PREFACE.
Several times during my long residence in Hong Kong I endeavoured

to read through the Narrative of Fa-hien
' ;' but though interested with the
graphic details of much of the work, its columns bristled so constantly
now with his phonetic representations of Sanskrit words, and now with
his substitution for them of their meanings in Chinese characters, and I
was, moreover, so much occupied with my own special labours on the

Confucian Classics, that my success was far from satisfactory. When
Dr. Eitel's '
Handbook Buddhism appeared
for the Student of Chinese '
in 1870, the difficulty occasioned by the Sanskrit words and names was
removed, but the other difficulty remained and I was not able to look
;
into the book again for several years. Nor had I much inducement to
do so in the two copies of it which I had been able to procure, on poor
paper, and printed from blocks badly cut at first, and so worn with use
as to yield books the reverse of attractive in their appearance to the
student.
In the meantime I kept studying the subject of Buddhism from
various sources; and in 1878 began to lecture, here in Oxford, on the
Travels with my Davis Chinese scholar, who was at the same time Boden
Sanskrit scholar. As we went on, I wrote out a translation in English
for my own satisfaction of nearly half the narrative. In the beginning
of last year I made Fa-hien again the subject of lecture, wrote out a
second translation, independent of the former, and pushed on till I had
completed the whole.
The want of a good and clear text had been supplied by my friend,
* a 2
xji PREFACE.
Mr. Bunyiu Nanjio, who sent to me from Japan a copy, the text of
which appended to the translation and notes, and of the nature of
is
which some account is given in the Introduction (page 4), and towards
the end of this Preface.
The present work consists of three parts : the Translation of Fa-hien's
Narrative of his Travels ; copious Notes ; and the Chinese Text of my
copy from Japan.
It is for the Translation that I hold myself more especially respon-
sible. Portions of it were written out three times, and the whole of it
twice. While preparing my own version I made frequent reference to

previous translations :
—
those of M. Abel Remusat, Revu, complete, et '
augmente d eclaircissements nouveaux par MM. Klaproth et Landresse'

(Paris, 1836) ; of the Rev. Samuel Beal (London, 1869), and his revision of
it, prefixed to his '
Buddhist Records of the Western World ' (Triibner's
Oriental Series, 1884) ; and of Mr. Herbert A. Giles, of H. M.'s Consular
Service in China (1877). To these I have to add a series of articles on
' Fa-hsien and his English Translators,' by Mr. T. Watters, British
Consul at 1-Chang (China Review, 1879, 1880). Those articles are
of the highest value, displaying accuracy of Chinese scholarship and an

extensive knowledge of Buddhism. I have regretted that Mr. Watters,
while reviewing others, did not himself write out and publish a version
of the whole of Fa-hien's narrative. If he had done so, I should pro-
bably have thought that, on the whole, nothing more remained to be
done for the distinguished Chinese pilgrim in the way of translation.
Mr. Watters had to judge of the comparative merits of the versions of
Beal and Giles, and pronounce on the many points of contention between
them. I have endeavoured to eschew those matters, and have seldom
made remarks of a critical nature in defence of renderings of my own.
The Chinese narrative runs on without any break. It was Klaproth
who divided Remusat's translation into forty chapters. The division
is helpful to the reader, and I have followed it excepting in three or
four instances. In the reprinted Chinese text the chapters are separated
by a circle (O) in the column.
In transliterating the nam.es of Chinese characters I have generally
PREFACE. xiii
followed the spelling of Morrison rather than the Pekinese, which is
now in vogue. We cannot tell exactly what the pronunciation of them

was, about fifteen hundred years ago, in the time of Fa-hien ; but the
southern mandarin must be a shade nearer to it than that of Peking at
the present day. In transliterating the Indian names I have for the
most part followed Dr. Eitel, with such modification as seemed good
and in harmony with growing usage.
For the Notes I can do little more than claim the merit of selection and
condensation. My first object in them was to explain what in the text
required explanation to an English reader. All Chinese texts, and

Buddhist texts especially, are new to foreign students. One has to do
for them what many hundreds of the ablest scholars in Europe have
done for the Greek and Latin Classics during several hundred years, and
what the thousands of critics and commentators have been doing for our
Sacred Scriptures for nearly eighteen centuries. There are few pre-
decessors in the field of Chinese literature into whose labours translators
of the present century can enter. This will be received, I hope, as a
sufficient apology for the minuteness and length of some of the notes.
A second object in them was to teach myself first, and then
others, something of the history and doctrines of Buddhism. I have
thought that they might be learned better in connexion with a lively
narrative like that of Fa-hien than by reading didactic descriptions and
argumentative books. Such has been my own experience. The books
which I have consulted for these notes have been many, besides Chinese
works. My principal help has been the full and masterly handbook of
Eitel, mentioned already, and often referred to as E. H. Spence Hardy's
'
Eastern Monachism '
(E. M.) and '
Manual of Buddhism (M. '
B.) have
been constantly in hand, as well as Rhys Davids' Buddhism, published by
the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, his Hibbert Lectures, and
his Buddhist Suttas in the Sacred Books of the East, and other writings.
I need not mention other authorities, having endeavoured always to
specify them where I make use of them. My proximity and access to
the Bodleian Library and the Indian Institute have been of great
advantage.
xiv PREFACE.
I may be allowed to say that, so far as my own study of it has gone,
I think there are many things in the vast field of Buddhistic literature
which still require to be carefully handled. How far, for instance, are
we entitled to regard the present Sutras as genuine and sufficiently

accurate copies of those which were accepted by the Councils before our
Christian era ? Can anything be done to trace the rise of the legends
and marvels of Sakyamuni's history, which were current so early (as it
seems to us) as the time of Fa-hien, and which startle us so frequently

by similarities between them and narratives in our Gospels ? Dr. Her-
mann Oldenberg, certainly a great authority on Buddhistic subjects,
says that ' Buddha has not come down to us from ancient
a biography of
times, from the age of the Pali texts and, we can safely say, no such
;
—
biography existed then' (' Buddha His Life, His Doctrine, His Order,'
as translated by Hoey, p. 78). He has also (in the same work, pp. 99,
416, 417) come to the conclusion that the hitherto unchallenged tradition
that the Buddha was a king's son must be given up. The name,
'
'
'king's son' (in Chinese ^ ^), always used of the Buddha, certainly
am content myself to
requires to be understood in the highest sense. I
wait for further information on these and other points, as the result of
prolonged and careful research.
Dr. Rhys Davids has kindly read the proofs of the Translation and
Notes, and I most cordially thank him for doing so, for his many
valuable corrections in the Notes, and for other suggestions which I have
received from him. I may not always think on various points exactly
as he does, but I am not more forward than he is to say with Horace,
'
Nullius addictus jurare in verba magistri.'
I have referred above, and also in the Introduction, to the Corean

text of Fa-hien's narrative, which I received from Mr. Nanjio. It is
on the whole so much superior to the better-known texts, that I deter-

mined to attempt to reproduce it at the end of the little volume, so
far as our resources here in Oxford would permit. To do so has not
been an easy task. The two fonts of Chinese types in the Clarendon
Press were prepared primarily for printing the translation of our Sacred
PREFACE. XV
Scriptures, and then extended so as to be available for printing also the
Confucian Classics ; but a Buddhist work necessarily requires many-

types not found in them, while many other characters in the Corean
recension are peculiar in their forms, andsome are what Chinese diction-
aries denominate That we have succeeded so well as we have
'
vulgar.'
done is owing chiefly to the intelligence, ingenuity, and untiring atten-

tion of Mr. J. C. Pembrey, the Oriental Reader.
The pictures that have been introduced were taken from a superb
edition of a History of Buddha, republished recently at Hang-chau in
Cheh-kiang, and profusely illustrated in the best style of Chinese art.
I am indebted for the use of it to the Rev. J. H. Sedgwick, University

Chinese Scholar.
JAMES LEGGE.
Oxford :
June, I
NOTE ON THE SKETCH-MAP.
The accompanying
Skerch-Map, taken in
connexion with the notes on the different
places in the Narrative, will give the reader
a sufficiently accurate knowledge of F4-hien's
route.
There is no difficulty in laying it down

after he crossed the Indus from east to west
into the Punjab, all the principal places, at
%\ hich he touched or rested, having been de-
termined by Cunningham and other Indian
geographers and archiEologists. Most of the
places from Ch'ang-an to Bannu have also
been identified. Woo-e has been put down as
near Kutcha, or Kuldja, in 43° 25' N., 8l° 1 5' E.
The country of K'ieh-ch'a was probably
Ladak, but 1 am inclined to think that the
place where the traveller crossed the Indus
and entered it must have been farther east
than .Skardo. A doubt is intimated on
page
24 as to the identification of T'o-leih with
Darada, but Greenough's 'Physical and
Geological Sketch-Map of British India'
shows Dardu Proper,' all lying on the
'
east
of the Indus, exactly in the position
where
the Narrative would lead us
to place it.
The point at which FS-hien recrossed
the
Indus into Udy4na on the
west of it is
unknown. Takshaiili, which he visited, was
no doubt on the west of the river,
and has
been incorrectly accepted as the Taxila of
Arrian in the Punjab. It
should be written
Takshasira, of which the Chinese
phonetisa-
tion will allow;
-see a note of Seal in his
'Buddhist Records of the
Western World'
i. 138.
We must suppose that Fa-hien
went on
from Nan-king to Chang-an,
but the Narra-
tive does not record
the fact of his doing
so
INTRODUCTION.
LIFE OF FA-HIEN ; GENUINENESS AND INTEGRITY OF THE TEXT OF
HIS NARRATIVE ; NUMBER OF THE ADHERENTS OF BUDDHISM.
I. Nothing of great importance is known about Fa-hien in addition

to what may be gathered from his own record of his travels. I have
read the accounts of him in the '
Memoirs of Eminent Monks,' com-
piled in A. D. 519, and a later work, the 'Memoirs of Marvellous
Monks,' by the third emperor of the Ming dynasty (a. D. 1403-1424),
which, however, is nearly all borrowed from the other; and all in
them that has an appearance of verisimilitude can be brought within
brief compass.
His surname, they tell us, was Kung^j and he was a native of Wil-
yang ^ in P'ing-yang '^,
which is still the name of a large department in
Shan-hsi. He had three brothers older than himself; but when they
all died before shedding their first teeth, his father devoted him to the
service of the Buddhist society, and had him entered as a Sramanera,
still keeping him at home in the family. The little fellow fell danger-
ously ill, and the father sent him to the monaster>% where he soon got
well and refused to return to his parents.
When he was ten years old, his father died ; and an uncle, considering
the widowed solitariness and helplessness of the mother, urged him to
renounce the monastic life, and return to her, but the boy replied, ' I did
not quit the family in compliance with my father's wishes, but because
I wished to be far from the dust and vulgar ways of life. This is why
I choose monkhood.' The uncle approved of his words and gave over
^ THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
urging him. When his mother also died, it appeared how great had
been the affection for her of his fine nature; but after her burial he
returned to the monastery.
On one occasion he was cutting rice with a score or two of his fellow-
disciples, when some hungry thieves came upon them to take away their
grain by force. The other Sramaneras all fled, but our young hero
stood his ground, and said to the thieves, '
If you must have the grain,
take what you please. But, Sirs, it was your former neglect of charity
which brought you to your present state of destitution ; and now,
again,you wish to rob others. I am afraid that in the coming ages
you will have still greater poverty and distress ; — I am sorry for you
beforehand.' With these words he followed his companions to the
monaster}', while the thieves left the grain and went away, all the
monks, of whom there were several hundred, doing homage to his
conduct and courage.

When he had finished his noviciate and taken on him the obligations
of the full Buddhist orders, his earnest courage, clear intelligence, and
strict regulation of his demeanour were conspicuous ; and soon after, he
undertook his journey to India in search of complete copies of the
Vinaya-pitaka. What follows this is merely an account of his
travels in India and return to China by sea, condensed from his own
narrative, with the addition of some marvellous incidents that happened
to him, on his visit to the Vulture Peak near Rajagriha.
It is said in the end that after his return to China, he went to the capital
(evidently Nanking), and there, along with the Indian Sramana Buddha-
bhadra, executed translations of some of the works which he had
obtained in India ; and that before he had done all that he wished to
do in this way, he removed to King-chow ' (in the present Hoo-pih),
and died in the monastery of Sin, at the age of eighty-eight, to the
great sorrow of all who knew him. It is added that there is another
larger work giving an account of his travels in various countries.
Such is all the information given about our author, beyond what he
'mm-
INTRODUCTION. 3
has himself told us. Fa-hien was his clerical name, and means '
Illus-
trious in the Law,' or '

Illustrious master of the Law.' The Shih which
often precedes it is an abbreviation of the name of Buddha as Sakya-
niuni, '
the Sakya, mighty in Love, dwelling in Seclusion and Silence,'
and may be taken as equivalent to Buddhist. He is sometimes said to
have belonged to 'the eastern Tsin dynasty' (a.d. 317-419), and some-
times to '
the Sung,' that is, the Sung dynasty of the House of Liu (a.d.
420-478). If he became a full monk at the age of twenty, and went to
India when he was twenty-five, his long life may have been divided
pretty equally between the two dynasties.
2. If there were ever another and larger account of Fa-hien's travels
than the narrative of which a translation is now given, it has long ceased
to be in existence.
In the Catalogue of the imperial library of the Suy dynasty (A.D. 5H9-
618), the name Fa-hien occurs four times. Towards the end of the last
section of it (page 22), after a reference to his travels, his labours in
translation at Kin-ling (another name for Nanking), in conjunction with
Buddha-bhadra, are described. In the second section, page 15, we find
'A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms;' —with a note, saying that it
was the work of 'the Sramana, Fa-hien;' and again, on page 13, we
have Narrative of Fa-hien in two Books,' and Narrative of Fa-hien's
' '
Travels in one Book.' But all these three entries may possibly belong
to difTerent copies of the same work, the first and the other two being
in separate subdivisions of the Catalogue.
In the two Chinese copies of the narrative in my possession the
title is '
Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms.' In the Japanese or Corean
recension subjoined to this translation, the title is twofold ; first, ' Narrative
of the Distinguished Monk, Fa-hien and then, more at large, Incidents
;' '
of Travels in India, by the Sramana of the Eastern Tsin, Fa-hien,

recorded by himself.'
There is still earlier attestation of the existence of our little work than
the Suy Catalogue. The Catalogue Raisonne of the imperial library
of the present dynasty (chap. 71) mentions two quotations from itby
Le Tao-yiien, a geographical writer of the dynasty of the Northern Wei
b 2
4 THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
(a.D. 386-584), one of them containing 89 characters, and the other 276;
both of them given as from the '
Narrative of Fa-hien.'
In all catalogues subsequent to that of Suy our work appears.
The evidence for its authenticity and genuineness is all that could
be required. It is clear to myself that the 'Record of Buddhistic
Kingdoms' and the 'Narrative of his Travels by Fa-hien' were desig-
same work, and that it is doubtful whether any
nations of one and the
larger work on the same subject was ever current. With regard to
the text subjoined to my translation, it was published in Japan in
1779. The had before him four recensions of the narrative;
editor
those of the Sung and Ming dynasties, with appendixes on the names of
certain characters in them ; that of Japan ; and that of Corea. He wisely
adopted the Corean text, published in accordance with a royal rescript
in 1726, so far as I can make out ; but the different readings of the other
texts are all given in top-notes, instead of foot-notes as with us, this
being one of the points in which customs in the east and west go by
contraries. Very occasionally, the editor indicates by a single character,
equivalent to '
right ' or '
wrong,' which reading in his opinion is to be
preferred. In the notes to the present republication of the Corean
text, S stands for Sung, M for Ming, and J for Japanese ; R for right,
and W for wrong. I have taken the trouble to give all the various
readings (amounting to more than 300), partly as a curiosity and to
make my text complete, and partly to show how, in the transcription of
writings in whatever language, such variations are sure to occur,
'
maculae, quas aut incuria fudit,
Aut humana parum cavit natura,'
while on the whole they very slightly affect the meaning of the document.
The editors of the Catalogue Raisonne intimate their doubts of the
good taste and reliability of all Fa-hien's statements. It offends them
that he should call central India the 'Middle Kingdom,' and China,
which to them was the true and oaly Middle Kingdom, but '
a Border
land;'ît offends them as the vaunting language of a Buddhist writer,
whereas the reader will see in the expressions only an instance of what
Fa-hien calls his 'simple straightforwardness.'
INTRODUCTION. 5
As an instance of his unreliability they refer to his account of the

Buddhism of Khoten, whereas it is well known, they say, that the
Khoteners from ancient times till now have been Mohammedans; —as
if they could have been so 1 70 years before Mohammed was born, and
222 years before the year of the Hegira! And this is criticism in China.
The Catalogue was ordered by the K'ien-lung emperor in 1722.
Between three and four hundred of the 'Great Scholars' of the empire
were engaged on it in various departments, and thus egregiously igno-
rant did they show themselves of all beyond the limits of their own
country, and even of the literature of that country itself.
Much of what Fa-hien tells his readers of Buddhist miracles and

legends is indeed unreliable and grotesque ; but we have from him the
truth as to what he saw and heard.
3. In concluding this introduction I wish to call attention to some
estimates of the number of Buddhists in the world which have become
current, believing, as I do, that the smallest of them is much above what
is correct.
i. In a note on the first page of his work on the Bhilsa Topes (1854),
General Cunningham says : 'The Christians number about 270 millions;
the Buddhists about 222 millions, who are distributed as follows :
— China
170 millions, Japan 25, Anam 14, Siam 3, Ava 8, Nepal i, and Ceylon i
total, 222 millions.'
ii. In his article on M. J. Barthelemy Saint Hilaire's '

Le Bouddha et
sa Religion,' republished in his '
Chips from a German Workshop,' vol. i.
(1868), Professor Max Miiller (p. 215) says, 'The young prince became
the founder of a religion which, after more than two thousand years, is
still by 455 millions of human beings,' and he appends the

professed
following note Though truth is not settled by majorities, it would be
:
'
interesting to know which religion counts at the present moment the

largest numbers of believers. Berghaus, in his " Physical Atlas," gives the
following division of the human race according to religion :
— " Buddhists
31.2 per cent, Christians 30.7, Mohammedans 15.7, Brahmanists 13.4,
Heathens 8.7, and Jews 0.3." As Berghaus does not distinguish the
Buddhists in China from the followers of Confucius and Laotse, the first
6 THE TRA VELS OF FA- HIEN.
place on the scale belongs really to Christianity. It is difficult in
China to say to what religion a man belongs, as the same person may
profess two or three. The emperor himself, after sacrificing according to
the ritual of Confucius, visits a Tao-sse temple, and afterwards bows
before an image of Fo in a Buddhist chapel. (" Melanges Asiatiques
de St. P^tersbourg," vol. ii. p. 374.)
iii. Both these estimates are exceeded by Dr. T. W. Rhys Davids

(intimating also the uncertainty of the statements, and that numbers are
no evidence of truth) in the introduction to his '
Manual of Buddhism.'
The Buddhists there appear as amounting in all to 500 millions :
30 millions of Southern Buddhists, in Ceylon, Burma, Siam, Anam,

and India and 470 millions of Northern Buddhists, of whom
(Jains) ;
nearly '^'>, are assigned to Japan, and 414,686,974 to the

millions
eighteen provinces of China proper. According to him, Christians
amount to about 26 per cent of mankind, Hindus to about 13,
Mohammedans to about 12^, Buddhists to about 40, and Jews to
about \.
all these estimates, it will be observed that the immense

In regard to
numbers assigned to Buddhism are made out by the multitude of
Chinese with which it is credited. Subtract Cunningham's 1 70 millions
of Chinese from his total of 222, and there remains only 52 millions of
Buddhists. Subtract Davids' (say) 414I millions of Chinese from his
total of 500, and there remain only 85^ millions for Buddhism. Of the
numbers assigned to other countries, as well as of their whole populations,
I am in considerable doubt, excepting in the cases of Ceylon and India ;
but the greatness of the estimates turns upon the immense multitudes
said to be in China. I do not know what total population Cunningham
allowed for that country, nor on what principle he allotted 170 millions of
it to Buddhism ;
—perhaps he halved his estimate of the whole, whereas
Berghaus and Davids allotted to it the highest estimates that have been
given of the people.
But we have no certain information of the population of China. At
an interview with the former Chinese ambassador, Kwo Sung-tao, in
Paris, in 1878, I begged him to write out for me the amount, with the
INTRODUCTION. 7
authority for it, and he assured me that it could not be done. I have
read probably almost everything that has been published on the subject,
and endeavoured by methods of my own to arrive at a satisfactory
conclusion ;
—without reaching a result which I can venture to lay before
the public. My impression has been that 400 millions is hardly an
exaggeration.
But supposing that we had reliable returns of the whole population,
how shall we proceed to apportion that among Confucianists, Taoists,
and Buddhists ? Confucianism is the orthodoxy of China. The common
name for it is Ju Chiao, 'the Doctrines held by the Learned Class,'
entrance into the circle of which is, with a few insignificant exceptions,
open to all the people. The mass of them and the masses under their
influence are preponderatingly Confucian ; and in the observance of
ancestral worship, the most remarkable feature of the religion proper
of China from the earliest times, of which Confucius was not the author
but the prophet, an over\vhelming majority are regular and assiduous.
Among '
the strange principles which the emperor of the K'ang-hsi
'
period, in one of his famous Sixteen Precepts, exhorted his people to

'
discountenance and put away, in order to exalt the correct doctrine,'
Buddhism and Taoism were both included. If, as stated in the note
quoted from Professor Miiller, the emperor countenances both the
Taoist worship and the Buddhist, he does so for reasons of state ; — to
please especially his Buddhistic subjects in Thibet and Mongolia, and
not to offend the many who.se superstitious fancies incline to Taoism.
When I went out and in as a missionary among the Chinese people for
about thirty years, it sometimes occurred to me that only the inmates of
their monasteries and the recluses of both systems should be enumerated
as Buddhists and Taoists but I was in the end constrained to widen that
;
judgment, and to admit a considerable following of both among the

people, who have neither received the tonsure nor assumed the yellow
top. Dr. Eitel, in concluding his discussion of this point in his '
Lecture
on Buddhism, an Event in History,' says :
'
It is not too much to say
that most Chinese are theoretically Confucianists, but emotionally
Buddhists or Taoists. But fairness requires us to add that, though the
8 THE TEA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
mass of the people are more or less influenced by Buddhist doctrines,
yet the people, as a whole, have no respect for the Buddhist church,
and habitually sneer at Buddhist priests.' For the most' in the former
'
of these two sentences I would substitute 'nearly all;' and between

my friend's 'but' and 'emotionally' I would introduce 'many are,' and
would not care to contest his conclusion farther. It does seem to me
preposterous to credit Buddhism with the whole of the vast population
of China, the great majority of whom are Confucianists. My own
opinion is, that its adherents are not so many as those even of
Mohammedanism, and that instead of being the most numerous of
the religions (so called) of the world, it is only entitled to occupy the
fifth place, ranking below Christianity, Confucianism, Brahmanism, and
Mohammedanism, and followed, some distance off, by Taoism. To
make a table of per-centages of mankind, and assign to each system its
proportion, is to seem to be wise where we are deplorably ignorant and, ;
moreover, if our means of information were much better than they are,
our figures would merely show the outward adherence. A fractional
per-centage might tell more for one system than a very large integral
one for another.
THE
TRAVELS OF FA-HIEN,
OR
RECORD OF BUDDHISTIC KINGDOMS.
CHAPTER I.
FROM CH"aNG-GAN TO THE SANDY DESERT.

Fa-hien had been living in Ch'ang-gan^. Deploring the mutilated
and imperfect state of the collection of the Books of Discipline, in the
second year of the period Hwang-che, being the Ke-hde year of the
cycle ^, he entered into an engagement with Hwuy-king, Tao-ching,
^ Ch'ang-gan is still the name of the principal district (and its city) in the
department of Se-gan, Shen-se. It had been the capital of the first empire
ofHan (b.c. 202-A.D. 24), as it subsequently was that of Suy (a.d. 589-618).
The empire of the eastern Tsin, towards the close of which Fa-hien lived, had
its capital at or near Nan-king, and Ch'ang-gan was the capital of the principal of
the three Ts'in kingdoms, which, with many other minor ones, maintained a semi-
independence of Tsin, their rulers sometimes even assuming the title of emperor.
^ The Hwang-che embraced from a.d. 399 to 414, being the greater
period
portion of the reign of Yao Hing of the After Ts'in, a powerful prince. He
adopted Hwang-che for the style of his reign in 399, and the cyclical name
of that year was Kang-tsze. It is not possible at this distance of time to explain,
if it could be explained, how Fa-hien came to say that Ke-hae was the
second year of the period. It seems most reasonable to suppose that he set
out on his pilgrimage in a.d. 399, the cycle name of which was Ke-liae, as '.
the second year, instead of — , the first, might easily creep into the text. In the
,
'
Memoirs of Eminent Monks it is said that our author started in
' the third year
of the period Lung-gan of the eastern Tsin, which was a.d. 399.
lo THE TRAVELS OF FA- HIEN.
Hwuy-ying, and Hwuy-wei^, that they should go to India and seek for
the Disciplinary Rules ^.
After starting from Ch'ang-gan, they passed through Lung^, and
came to the kingdom of K'een-kwei*, where they stopped for the
summer retreat^. When that was over, they went forward to the
kingdom of Now-t'an*, crossed the mountain of Yang-low, and reached
' These, like Fa-hien itself, are all what we might call '
clerical ' names,
appellations given to the parties as monks or sramanas.
' The Buddhist tripitaka or canon consists of three collections, containing,
according to Eitel (p. 1 50), '
doctrinal aphorisms (or statements, purporting
to be from Buddha himself); works on discipline; and works on metaphysics :'
called sdtra, vinaya, and abhidharma; king (*^), leuh (.^),

in Chinese,
and lun (g^), or texts, laws or rules, and discussions. Dr. Rhys Davids
objects to the designation of '
metaphysics ' as used of the abhidharma works,
saying that '
they bear much more the relation to " dharma " which " by-law
"
bears to " law " than that which " metaphysics " bears to " physics ' (Hibbert
Lectures, p. 49). However was about the vinaya works that
this be, it
Fd-hien was chiefly concerned. He wanted a good code of the rules for
the government of the Order in all its internal and external relations.
'
'
^ Lung embraced the western part of Shen-se and the eastern part of
Kan-siih. The name remains in Lung Chow, in the extreme w-est of Shen-se.
* K'een-kwei was the second king of the Western Ts'in.' His family '
was of northern or barbarous origin, from the tribe of the Seen-pe, with the
surname of K'eih-fuh. The first king was Kwo-jin, and received his appoint-
ment from the sovereign of the chief Ts'in kingdom in 385. He was succeeded
in 388 by his brother, the K'een-kwei of the text, who was very prosperous in 398,
and took the title of king of Ts'in. Fa-hien would find him at his capital,
somewhere in the present department of Lan-chow, Kan-sQh.
° Under varshas or varshavasana (Pali, vassa Spence Hardy, vass), ;
Eitel (p. 163) says: — 'One of the most ancient institutions of Buddhist
discipline, requiring all ecclesiastics to spend the rainy season in a monastery in
devotional exercises. Chinese Buddhists naturally substituted the hot season for the
rainy (from the i6th day of the 5th to the 15th day of the 9th Chinese month).'
^ During the troubled period of the Tsin dynasty, there were five (usurping)
Leang sovereignties in the western part of die empire (^ ^j. The name
Leang remains in the department of Leang-chow in the northern part of Kan-siih.
The 'southern Leang' arose in 397 under a T'lih-fah Wij-kii, who was succeeded
CH'AXG-GAN TO THE SANDF DESERT. ii
the emporium of Chang-yih\ There they found the country so much

disturbed that travelling on the roads was impossible for them. Its
king, however, was very attentive to them, kept them (in his capital),
and acted the part of their danapati".
Here they met with Che-yen, Hwuy-keen, Sang-shao, Pao-yun, and
Sang-king-^; and in pleasant association with them, as bound on the
same journey with themselves, they passed the summer retreat (of that
year)'' together, resuming after it their travelling, and going on to T'un-
hwang^, (the chief town) in the frontier territory of defence extending for
about 80 le from east to west, and about 40 from north to south. Their
company, increased as it had been, halted there for some days more than a
month, after which Fa-hien and his four friends started first in the suite of
an envoy ^, having separated (for a time) from Pao-yun and his associates.
in 399 by a brother, Le-luh-koo and he again by his brother, the Now-t'an of the
;
text, in 402, who was not yet king therefore when Fa-hien and his friends reached
his capital. How he is represented as being so may be accounted for in various
ways, of which it is not necessary to write.

' is still the name of a district in Kan-chow department, Kan-suh.
Chang-)ih
It is way north and west from Lan-chow, and not far from the Great Wall.
a long
Its king at this time was, probably, Twan-yeh of 'the northern Leang.'
^ Dana is the name for religious charity, the first of the six par ami t as,
or means of attaining to nirvana; and a danapati is 'one who practises dana

and thereby crosses (^) the sea of misery.' It is given as '
a tide of honour to
all who support the cause of Buddhism by acts of charit}-, especially to founders
and patrons of monasteries;' — see Eitel, p. 29.

'
Of these pilgrims with their clerical names, the most distinguished was
Pao-yun, who translated various Sanskrit works on his return from India, of which
only one seems to be now existing. He died in 449. See Nanjio's Catalogue
of the Tripitaka, col. 417.
* This was the second summer since the pilgrims left Ch'ang-gan. We are
now therefore, probably, in a. d. 400.

° T'un-hwang (lat. 39° 40' N. ; Ion. 94° 50' E.) is still the name of one of
the two districts constituting the department of Gan-se, the most western of the
prefectures of Kan-suh ; beyond the termination of the Great Wall.
^ Who this envoy was, and where he was going, we do not know. The text
will not admit of any other translation.

C 2
Le Hao', the prefect of T'un-hwang, had supplied them with the
means of crossing the desert (before them), in which there are many-
evil demons and hot winds. (Travellers) who encounter them perish all
to a man. There is not a bird to be seen in the air above, nor an animal
on the ground below. Though you look all round most earnestly to
find where you can cross, you know not where to make your choice,
the only mark and indication being the dry bones of the dead (left upon
the sand)-.
CHAPTER II.
ON TO SHEN-SHEN AND THENCE TO KHOTEN.

After travelling for seventeen days, a distance we may calculate of
about 1500 le, (the pilgrims) reached the kingdom of Shen-shen^, a
Le Hao was a native of Lung-se, a man of learning, able and kindly in his
'
government. He was appointed governor or prefect of T'un-hwang by the king

of the northern Leang,' in 400
'
and there he sustained himself, becoming
;
by and by duke of western Leang,' till he died in 417.

'
;
^ The river of sand
'
the great desert of Kobi or Gobi
' having various ;
other names. It was a great task which the pilgrims had now before them,
to cross this desert. The name of river in the Chinese misleads the reader, '
'
and he thinks of the crossing it as of crossing a stream but they had to traverse ;
it from east to west. In his 'Vocabulary of Proper Names,' p. 23, Dr. Porter
Smith says :
— ' It extends from the eastern frontier of Mongolia, south-westward
to the further frontier of Turkestan, to within six miles of Ilchi, the chief town
of Khoten. It thus comprises some twenty-three degrees of longitude in length,
and from three to ten degrees of latitude in breadth, being about 2,100 miles in
its greatest length. In some places it is arable. Some idea may be formed
of the terror with which this " Sea of Sand," with its vast billows of shifting
sands, is regarded, from the legend that in one of the storms 360 cities were
all buried within the space of twenty-four hours.' See also Gilmour's
'
Among the Mongols,' chap. 5.
^ An account is given of the kingdom of Shen-shen in the 96th of the
Books of the first Han dynasty, down to its becoming a dependency of
China, about b. c. 80. The greater portion of that is now accessible to the
English reader in a translation by Mr. Wylie in the '
Journal of the Anthropo-
logical Institute,' August, 1880. Mr. Wylie says: — 'Although we may not
TO SHEX-SHEN AND THEXCE TO KHOTEN. 13
country rugged and hilly, with a thin and barren soil. The clothes of
the common people are coarse, and like those worn in our land of
Han *, some wearing felt and others coarse serge or cloth of hair this ; —
was the only difference seen among them. The king professed (our)
Law, and there might be in the country more than four thousand monks^,
be able to identify Shen-shen with certainty, yet we have sufiBcient indications
to give an approximate idea of its position, as being south of and not far from
lake Lob.' He then goes into an exhibition of those indications, which I need
not transcribe. It is sufficient for us to know that the capital city was not far
from Lob or Lop Nor, into which in Ion. 38° E. the Tarim flows. Fa-hien
estimated its distance to be 1500 le from T'un-hwang. He and his companions
must have gone more than twenty-five miles a day to accomplish the journey
in seventeen days.
' This is the name which Fa-hien always uses when he would speak of
China, his native country, as a whole, calling it from the great d)'nasty which had
ruled it, first and last, for between four and five centuries. Occasionally, as we
shall immediately see, he speaks of the ' territory of Ts'in or Ch'in,' but intending
thereby only the kingdom of Ts'in, having its capital, as described in the first note
on the last chapter, in Ch'ang-gan.

* So I prefer to translate the character 'j'^ (sang) rather than by 'priests.'
Even in Christianity, beyond the priestly privilege which belongs to all believers,
I object to the ministers of any denomination or church calling themselves or

;
being called '
priests and much more is the name inapplicable to the sramanas
'
or bhikshus of Buddhism which acknowledges no God in the universe, no soul

in man, and has no services of sacrifice or prayer in its worship. The only
difficulty in the use of '
monks ' is caused by the members of the sect in Japan
which, since the middle of the fifteenth century, has abolished the prohibition
against marrying on the part of its ministers, and other prohibitions in diet and
dress. Sang and sang-kea represent the Sanskrit sahgha, which denotes
(E. H., p. 117), first, an assembly of monks, or bhikshu sahgha, constituted
by at least four members, and empowered to hear confession, to grant absolution,
to admit persons to holy orders, &c. ; secondly, the third constituent of the
Buddhistic Trinity, a deification of the communio sanctorum, or the Buddhist
order. The name is used by our author of the monks collectively or individually
as belonging to the class, and may be considered as synonymous with the name
sramana, which will immediately claim our attention.
\\\\o were all students of the hinayana^. The common people of
this and other kingdoms (in that region), as well as the ^ramans^,
all practise the rules of India*, only that the latter do so more
exactly, and the former more loosely. So (the travellers) found it
in all the kingdoms through which they went on their way from this
to the west, only that each had its own peculiar barbarous speech ^.
(The monks), however, who had (given up the worldly life) and
quitted their families, were all students of Indian books and the
Indian language. Here they stayed for about a month, and then
proceeded on their journey, fifteen days walking to the north-west
bringing them to the country of Woo-e '. In this also there were more
' Meaning the '

small vehicle, or conveyance.' There are in Buddhism the
triyana, or 'three different means of salvation, i.e. of conveyance across the
samsara, or sea of transmigration, to the shores of nirvana. Afterwards
the term was used to designate the different phases of development through
which the Buddhist dogma passed, known as the mahayana, hinayana,
and madhyamayana.' 'The hinayana is the simplest vehicle of salvation,
corresponding to the first of the three degrees of saintship. Characteristics
of it are the preponderance of active moral asceticism, and the absence of
speculative mysticism and quietism.' E. H., pp. 151-2, 45, and 117.
- The name for India is here the same as in the former chapter and
throughout the book, —T'een-chuh (^ ^ ), the chuh being pronounced, pro-

bably, in Fa-hien's time as tuk. How the earliest name for India, Shin-tuk or
duk=Scinde, came to be changed into Thien-tuk, it would take too much
space to explain. I believe it was done by the Buddhists, wishing to give
a good auspicious name to the fatherland of their Law, and calling it the '
Heavenly Tuk,' just as the Mohammedans call Arabia the Heavenly region '
(^ ~)]\ and the court of China itself is called 'the Celestial

(5^^^). '
^raman may in English take the place of 6 ra man a (Pali, Samana; in Chinese,
^ '
'
Sha-man), the name for Buddhist monks, as those who have separated themselves
from (left) their families, and quieted their hearts from all intrusion of desire and
lust. '
It is employed, first, as a general name for ascetics of all denominadons, and,
secondly, as a general designation of Buddhistic monks.' E. H., pp. 130, 131.
*
Tartar or Mongolian.
° Woo-e has not been identified. Walters (' China Review,' viii. 115) says:
'
\\'e cannot be far wrong if we place it in Kharaschar, or between that and
TO SHEN-SHEN AND THENCE TO KHOTEN. 15
than four thousand monks, all students of the hinayana. They were
very strict in their rules, so that sramans from the territory of Ts'in^ were
all Fa-hien, through the management
unprepared for their regulations.
ofFoo Kung-sun, maitre d'hotellerie^, was able to remain (with his
company in the monastery where they were received) for more than two
months, and here they were rejoined by Pao-yun and his friends ^. (At
the end of that time) the people of Woo-e neglected the duties of pro-
priety and righteousness, and treated the strangers in so niggardly a
manner that Che-jên, Hwuy-keen, and Hwuy-wei went back towards
Kao-ch'ang*, hoping to obtain there the means of continuing their
journey. Fa-hien and the rest, however, through the liberality of Foo
Kung-sun, managed to go straight forward in a south-west direction.
They found the country uninhabited as they went along. The difficulties
Kutscha.' It must have been a country of considerable size to have so many

monks in it.
' This means in one sense China, but Fa-hien, in his use of the name, was only
thinking of the three Ts'in states of which I have spoken in a previous note j
perhaps only of that from the capital of which he had himself set out.
^ This sentence altogether is difEcuk to construe, and I\Ir. Walters, in the
'
China Review,' was the first to disentangle more than one knot in it. I am
obliged to adopt the reading of :^ ^^ in the Chinese editions, instead of the
'iFr S in the Corean text. It seems clear that only one person is spoken of as
assisting the travellers, and his name, as appears a few sentences farther on, was
Foo Kung-sun. The ^^ ^, which immediately follows the surname Foo (^J^),
must be taken as the name of his office, corresponding, as the
of le maitre d'hotellerie in a Roman Catholic abbey.
shows, to that
I was once indebted
^
myself to the kind help of such an officer at a monastery in Canton province.
The Buddhistic name for him is ud de si k a, = overseer. The Kung-sun that
follows his surname indicates he was descended from some feudal lord in
that
the old times of the Chow dynasty. We know indeed of no ruling house which
had the surname of Foo, but its adoption by the grandson of a ruler can be satis-
factorily accounted for; and his posterity continued to call themselves Kung-sun,
duke or lord's grandson, and so retain the memory of the rank of their ancestor.
' Whom they had left behind them at T'un-hwang.
* The country of the Ouighurs, the district around the modern Turfan or
Tangut.
which they encountered in crossing the streams and on their route, and
the sufferings which they endured, were unparalleled in human experi-
ence, but in the course of a month and five days they succeeded in
reaching Yu-teen \
CHAPTER III.
KHOTEN. PROCESSIONS OF IMAGES. THE KING'S NEW MONASTERY.

Yu-TEEN is a pleasant and prosperous kingdom, with a numerous and
flourishing population. The inhabitants all profess our Law, and join
together in its religious music for their enjoyment ^. The monks amount
to several myriads, most of whom are students of the mahayana''.
They all receive their food from the common store*. Throughout the
' Yu-teen is better known as Khoten. Dr. P. Smith gives (p. ii) the fol-
lowing description of it : —A
on the south-west of the desert of
' large district
Gobi, embracing all the country south of Oksu and Yarkand, along the northern
base of the Kwun-lun mount ins, for more than 300 miles from east to west.
The town of the same name, now called Ilchi, is in an extensive plain on the
Khoten river, in lat. 37° N., and Ion. 80° 35' E. After the Tungani insurrection
against Chinese rule in 1862, the Mufti Haji Habeeboolla was made governor of
Khoten, and held the office till he was murdered by Yakoob Beg, who became for
a time the conqueror of all Chinese Turkestan. Khoten produces fine linen and
cotton stuffs, jade ornaments, copper, grain, and fruits.' The name in Sanskrit is
Kustana (E. H., p. 60).
^ This fondness for music among the Khoteners is mentioned by Hsiian
Ch'wang and others.
^ Mahayana ; see note i on p. 14. It is a later form of the Buddhist doctrine,
the second phase of its development corresponding to the state of a Bodhisattva,
who, being able to transport himself and all mankind to nirvana, may be compared
to a huge vehicle. See Davids on the '
Key-note of the " Great Vehicle,"
Hibbert Lectures, p. 254.
* Fa-hien supplies sufficient information of how the common store or funds of
the monasteries were provided, farther on in chapters xvi and xxxix, as well as in
other passages. As the point is important, I will give here, from Davids' fifth
Hibbert Lecture (p. 178), some of the words of the dying Buddha, taken from
'
The Book of the Great Decease," as illustrating the statement in this text : — ' So
MONASTERIES OF KHOTEN. 17
country' the houses of the people stand apart like (separate) stars, and
each family has a small tope ^ reared in front of its door. The smallest
of these may
be twenty cubits high, or rather more -. They make (in
the monasteries) rooms for monks from all quarters ^, the use of which
is given to travelling monks who may arrive, and who are provided
with whatever else they require.

The lord of the country lodged Fa-hien and the others comfortably,
and supplied their wants, in a monastery * called Gomati ^, of the
mahayana school. Attached to it there are three thousand monks, who
long as the brethren shall persevere in kindness of action, speech, and thought
among the saints, both in public and private ; so long as they shaU di\ide without
partiality, and share in common with the upright and holy, all such things as they
receive in accordance with the just provisions of the order, down even to the mere
contents of a begging bowl ; .... so long may the brethren be expected not to
decline, but to prosper.'
^ The Chinese ^^ (t'ah; in Cantonese, t'ap), as used by Fa-hien, is, no

doubt, a phonetisation of the Sanskrit stupa orthupa; and it is
Pali well in
translating to use for the structures described by him the name of topes, — made
familiar by Cunningham and other Indian antiquarians. In the thirteenth chapter
there is an account of one built under the superintendence of Buddha himself,
'
as a model for all topes in future.' They were usually in the form of bell-shaped
domes, and were solid, surmounted by a long tapering pinnacle formed with a series
of rings, varying in number. But their form, I suppose, was often varied ;
just as
we have in China pagodas of different shapes. There are several topes now in
the Indian Institute at Oxford, brought from Buddha Gaya, but the largest of them
is much smaller than 'the smallest' of those of Khoten. They were intended
chiefly to contain relics of Buddha and famous masters of his Law ; but what
relics could there be in the Triratna topes of chapter xvi?
^ The meaning here is much disputed. The author does not mean to say
that the monk's apartments were made '

square,' but that the monasteries were
made with many guest-chambers or spare rooms.
^ The Sanskrit term for a monastery is used here, — Sahgharama, 'gardens
of the assembly,' originally denoting only '
the siurounding park, but afterwards
transferred to the whole of the premises ' (E. H., p. 118). Gomati, the name of this
monastery, means '

rich in cows.'
d
are called to their meals by the sound of a bell. When they enter
the refectory, their demeanour is marked by a reverent gravity, and they
take their seats in regular order, all maintaining a perfect silence. No

sound heard from their alms-bowls and other utensils. When any of
is
these pure men ^ require food, they are not allowed to call out (to the
attendants) for it, but only make signs with their hands.
Hwuy-king, Tao-ching, and Hwuy-tah set out in advance towards the
country of K'eeh-ch'a - but Fa-hien and the others, wishing to see the
;
procession of images, remained behind for three months. There are in

this country four ^ great monasteries, not counting the smaller ones.
Beginning on the first day of the fourth month, they sweep and water the
streets inside the city, making a grand display in the lanes and byways.
Over the city gate they pitch a large tent, grandly adorned in all pos-
sible ways, in which the king and queen, with their ladies brilliantly
arrayed *, take up their residence (for the time).
The monks of the Gomati monastery, being mahayana students, and
held in greatest reverence by the king, took precedence of all the others
in the procession. At a distance of three or four le from the city, they
made a four-wheeled image car, more than thirty cubits high, which looked
like the great hall (of a monastery) moving along. The seven precious
substances ^ were grandly displayed about it, with silken streamers and
^ A denomination for the monks as vimala, 'undefiled' or 'pure.' Giles

makes it '
the menials that attend on the monks,' but I have not met with it in
that application.
^ K'eeh-ch'a has not been clearly identified, R^musat made it Cashmere ;
Klaproth, Iskardu ; Beal makes it Kartchou ; and Eitel, Khas'a, ' an ancient tribe
on the Paropamisus, the Kasioi of Ptolemy.' I think it was Ladak, or some well-
known place in it. Hwuy-tah, unless that name be an alias, appears here for
the first time.
;
' Instead of '
four.' the Chinese copies of the te.xt have '
fourteen ' but the
Corean reading is, probably, more correct.
;
* There may have been, as Giles says, ' maids of honour ' but the character
does not say so.
° The Sapta-ratna, gold, silver, lapis lazuli, rock crystal, rubies, diamonds
PROCESSIONS OF IMAGES. 19
canopies hanging all around. The

image' stood in the middle of
(chief)
the car, with two Bodhisattvas ^ in attendance on it, while devas ' were
made to follow in waiting, ail brilliantly carved in gold and silver, and
hanging in the air. When (the car) was a hundred paces from the gate,
the king put off his crown of state, changed his dress for a fresh suit, and
with bare feet, carrying in his hands flowers and incense, and with two
rows of attending followers, went out at the gate to meet the image and, ;
with his head and face (bowed to the ground), he did homage at its feet,
and then scattered the flowers and burnt the incense. When the image
was entering the gate, the queen and the brilliant ladies with her in the
gallery above scattered far and wide all kinds of flowers, which floated
about and fell promiscuously to the ground. In this way everything was
done to promote the dignity of the occasion. The carriages of the monas-
teries were all different, and each one had its own day for the procession.
(The ceremony) began on the first day of the fourth month, and ended
on the fourteenth, after which the king and queen returned to the
palace.
Seven or eight le to the west of the city there is what is called the
King's New monastery, the building of which took eighty years, and
extended over three reigns. It may be 250 cubits in height, rich in elegant
or emeralds, and agate. See Sacred Books of the East (Davids' Buddhist Suttas),
vol. xi, p. 249.
'
No
doubt that of Sakyamuni himself
' A
Bodhisattva is one whose essence has become intelligence; a Being who
•will in some future birth as a man (not necessarily or usually the next) attain
to Buddhahood. The name does not include those Buddhas who have not yet
attained to parinirvana. The S}Tnbol of the state is an elephant fording a
river. Popularly, its abbreviated form P'u-sa is used in China for any idol or
image ; here the name has its proper signification.
^^1 'all the thien,'or simply 'the thien' taken as plural. But in Chinese
^^
the character called thien (^^) denotes heaven, or Heaven, and is interchanged
with Ti and Shang Ti, meaning God. With the Buddhists it denotes the devas
or Brahmanic gods, or all the inhabitants of the six devalokas. The usage shows
the antagonism between Buddhism and Brahmanism, and still more that between
it and Confucianism.
d 2
ao THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
carving and inlaid work, covered above with gold and silver, and finished
throughout with a combination of all the precious substances. Behind
the tope there has been built a Hall of Buddha \ of the utmost magni-
ficence and beauty, the beams, pillars, venetianed doors, and windows
being all overlaid with gold-leaf. Besides this, the apartments for the
monks are imposingly and elegantly decorated, beyond the power of
words to express. Of whatever things of highest value and preciousness
the kings in the six countries on the east of the (Ts'ung) range of
mountains ^ are possessed, they contribute the greater portion (to this
monastery), using but a small portion of them themselves ^.
^ Giles and Williams call this '

the oratory of Buddha.' But '
oratory ' gives
the idea of a small apartment, whereas the name here leads the mind to think of a
large '
hall.' I once accompanied the monks
of a large monastery from their
refectory to the Hall of Buddha, which was a lofty and spacious apartment
splendidly fitted up.
'^
The Ts'ung, or '
Onion ' range, called also the Belurtagh mountains, in-
cluding the Karakorum, and forming together the connecting links between the
more northern T'een-shan and the Kwun-lun mountains on the north of Thibet.
It would be difficult to name the six countries which Fa-hien had in mind.
' This seems to be the meaning here. My first impression of it was that the
author meant to say that the contributions which they received were spent by the
monks mainly on the buildings, and only to a small extent for themselves ; and
I still hesitate between that view and the one in the version.
There occurs here the binomial phrase kung-yang ('flt
^^), which is one
of the most common throughout the narrative, and is used not only of sup-
port in the way of substantial contributions given to monks, monasteries, and
Buddhism, but generally of all Buddhistic worship, if I may use that term
in the connexion. Let me here quote two or three sentences from Davids'
Manual (pp. 168-170): — 'The members of the order are secured from want.
There is no place in the Buddhist scheme for churches ; the offering of flowers
before the sacred tree or image of the Buddha takes the place of worship.
Buddhism does not acknowledge the efficacy of prayers; and in the warm
countries where Buddhists live, the occasional reading of the law, or preaching of
the word, in public, can take place best in the open air, by moonlight, under a
simple roof of trees or palms. There are five principal kinds of meditation, which
in Buddhism takes the place of prayer.'
TO K'EEH-CH'A.
CHAPTER IV.
THROUGH THE TS'UNG OR ONION MOUNTAINS TO K'EEH-CH'a'

' ;
PROBABLY SKARDO, OR SOME CITY MORE TO THE EAST IN

LADAK.
When the processions of images in the fourth month were over,
Sang-shao, by himself alone, followed a Tartar who was an earnest
follower of the Law ', and proceeded towards Kophene ^. Fa-hien
and the others went forward to the kingdom of Tsze-hoh, which it took
them twenty-five days to reach ^. Its king was a strenuous follower of
our Law *, and had (around him) more than a thousand monks, mostly
students of the mahayana. Here (the travellers) abode fifteen days, and
then went south for four days, when they found themselves among the
Ts'ung-Iing mountains, and reached the country of Yu-hwuy^, where they
It
' This Tartar is called a
^ ^,
occurs several times in the sequel, and denotes the
'
a man of the Tao,' or faith of Buddha.
man who is not a Buddhist
outwardly only, but inwardly as well, whose faith is always making itself manifest in
his wa)s. The name may be used of followers of other systems of faith besides
Buddhism.
- See the account of the kingdom of Kophene, in the 96th Book of the first
Han Records, p. 78, where its capital is said to be 12,200 le from Ch'ang-gan.
It was the whole or part of the present Cabulistan. The name of Cophene is
connected with the river Kophes, supposed to be the same as the present Cabul
river, which falls into the Indus, from the west, at Attock, after passing Peshawur.
The city of Cabul, the capital of Afghanistan, may be the Kophene of the text ; but
we do not know that Sang-shao and his guide got so far west. The text only
says that they set out from Khoten towards '
it.'
' Tsze-hoh has not been identified. Beal thinks it was Yarkand, which,
however, was north-west from Khoten. Watters ('China Review,' p. 135) rather
approves the suggestion of '
Tashkurgan in Sirikul for it. As it took Fa-hien
'
twenty-five days to reach it, it must have been at least 150 miles from Khoten.
* The king is described here by a Buddhistic phrase, denoting the possession
of vuyabala, ' the power of energy; persevering exertion — one of the five
moral powers ' (E. H., p. 1 70).

' Nor has Yu-hwuy been clearly identified. Evidently it was directly south from
aa THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
halted and kept their retreat ^. When this was over, they went on
among the hills ^ for twenty-five days, and got to K'eeh-ch'a^, there
rejoining Hwuy-king^ and his two companions.
CHAPTER V.
GREAT QUINQUENNIAL ASSEMBLY OF MONKS. RELICS OF

BUDDHA. PRODUCTIONS OF THE COUNTRY.
It happened that the king of the country was then holding the
pancha parishad, that is, in Chinese, the great quinquennial assembly^.
When be held, the king requests the presence of the Sramans
this is to
from all quarters (of his kingdom). They come (as if) in clouds and ;
when they are all assembled, their place of session is grandly decorated.
Silken streamers and canopies are hung out in it, and water-lilies in gold
and silver are made and fixed up behind the places where (the chief of
them) are to sit. When clean mats have been spread, and they are all
seated, the king and his ministers present their offerings according to rule
and law. (The assembly takes place), in the first, second, or third month,
for the most part in the spring.
Tsze-hoh, and among the 'Onion' mountains. Watters hazards the conjecture that
it was the Aktasch of our present maps.
'
This was the retreat already twice mentioned as kept by the pilgrims in the
summer, the different phraseology, '

quiet rest,' without any mention of the season,
indicating their approach to India, E. H., p. i68. Two, if not three, years had
elapsed since they left Ch'ang-gan. Are we now with them in 402 ?
° This is the Corean reading ([Jj), much preferable to the jj^ of the
Chinese editions.
' See p. 18, note 2. Watters approves of Klaproth's determination of K'eeh-
ch'a to be Iskardu or Skardo. There are difficulties in connexion with the
view, but it has the advantage, to my mind very great, of bringing the pilgrims
across the Indus. The passage might be accomplished with ease at this point of
the river's course, and therefore is not particularly mentioned.
* Who had preceded them from Khoten, p. 1 8.
' See Eitel, p. 89. He describes the assembly as '
an ecclesiastical conference,
first instituted by king Asoka for general confession of sins and inculcation
of morality.'
GREAT QUINQUENNIAL ASSEMBLY OF MONKS. 23
After the king has held the assembly, he further exhorts the ministers
to make other and special offerings. The doing of this extends over one,
five, or even seven days
two, three, and when all is finished, he takes
;
hisown riding-horse, saddles, bridles, and waits on him himself, while he

makes the noblest and most important minister of the kingdom mount
him. Then, taking fine white woollen cloth, all sorts of precious things,
and which the Sramans require, he distributes them among them,
articles
uttering vows at the same time along with all his ministers; and when
this distribution has taken place, he again redeems (whatever he wishes)
from the monks ^.
The country, being among the hills and cold, does not produce the
other cereals, and only the wheat gets ripe. After the monks have
received their annual (portion of this), the mornings suddenly show the
hoar-frost, and on this account the king always begs the monks to make
the wheat ripen ^ before they receive their portion. There is in the
country a spittoon which belonged to Buddha, made of stone, and in
colour like his alms-bowl. There is also a tooth of Buddha, for which
the people have reared a tope, connected with which there are more than
a thousand monks and their disciples'*, all students of the hinayana.
To the east of these hills the dress of the common people is of coarse
materials, as in our country of Ts'in, but here also' therewere among
them the and of serge or haircloth. The
differences of fine woollen cloth
rules observed by the Sramans are remarkable, and too numerous to be
mentioned in detail. The country is in the midst of the Onion range.
' The text of this sentence is perplexing; and all translators, including
mj'self, have been puzzled by it.
^ See what we are told of king Asoka's grant of all the Jambudvipa to
the monks in chapter xxvii. There are several other instances of similar gîfts
in the Mahavansa.
' Watters calls attention to this as showing that the monks of K'eeh-ch'a
had the credit of possessing weather-controlling powers.
* The text here has Y^ ^^, "o' fg alone. I often found in monasteries
boys and lads who looked up to certain of the monks as their preceptors.
° Compare what is said in chapter ii of the dress of the people of Shen-
shen.
As you go forward from these mountains, the plants, trees, and fruits are
all different from those of the land of Han, excepting only the bamboo,
pomegranate \ and sugar-cane.
CHAPTER VI.
ON TOWARDS NORTH INDIA. DARADA. IMAGE OF MAITREYA

BODHISATTVA.
From went westwards towards North India, and
this (the travellers)
after being on the way month, they succeeded in getting across
for a
and through the range of the Onion mountains. The snow rests on
them both winter and summer. There are also among them venomous
dragons, which, when provoked, spit forth poisonous winds, and cause
showers of snow and storms of sand and gravel. Not one in ten thousand
of those who encounter these dangers escapes with his life. The people
of the country call the range by the name of The Snow mountains.' '
When (the travellers) had got through them, they were in North India,
and immediately on entering its borders, found themselves in a small
kingdom called T'o-Ieih^, where also there were many monks, all students
of the hinayana.
In this kingdom there was formerly an Arhan ^, who by his supernatural
^ Giles thinks the fruit here was the guava, because the ordinary name for
'pomegranate' is preceded by gan (^^) ; but the pomegranate was called at

first Gan Shih-lau, as having been introduced into China from Gan-seih by
Chang K'een, who is referred to in chapter vii.
^ Eitel and others identify this with Darada, the country of the ancient
Dardae, the region near Dardus; lat. 30° 11' N., Ion. 73° 54' E. See E. H.,
p. 30. I am myself in more than doubt on the point. Cunningham (' Ancient
Geography of India,' p. 82) says, Darel is a valley on the riglit or western
'
bank of the Indus, now occupied by Dardus or Dards, from whom it received
its name.' But as I read our narrative, Fa-hien is here on the eastern bank
of the Indus, and only crosses to the western bank as described in the next
chapter.
' Lo-han, Arhat, Arahat are all designations of the perfected Arya, the
disciple who has passed the different stages of the Noble Path, or eightfold
THE FIGURE OF MAITREYA. 25
power^ took a clever artificer up to the Tushita^ heaven, to see the

height, complexion, and appearance of Maitreya Bodhisattva ^, and then
return and make an image of him in wood. First and last, this was done
three times, and then the image was completed, eighty cubits in height,
and eight cubits at the base from knee to knee of the crossed legs.
On fast-days it emits an effulgent light. The kings of the (surrounding)
countries vie with one another in presenting offerings to it. Here it
is, —
to be seen now as of old *.
excellent way, who has conquered all passions, and is not to be reborn again.
Arhatship implies possession of certain supernatural powers, and is not to be
succeeded by Buddhaship, but implies the fact of the saint having already attained
nirvana. Popularly, the Chinese designate by this name the wider circle of
Buddha's disciples, as well as the smaller ones of 500 and i8. No temple in
Canton is better worth a visit than that of the 500 Lo-han.
' Eiddhi-sakshatkriya, power of supernatural footsteps,'
'the a body = '
power over the body. E. H., p. 104.

flexible at pleasure,' or unlimited
- Tushita is the fourth Devaloka, where all Bodhisattvas are reborn before
finally appearing on earth as Buddha. Life lasts in Tushita 4000 years, but
twenty-four hours there are equal to 400 years on earth. E. H., p. 152.
' Maitreya (Spence Hardy, Maitri), often styled Ajita, '
the Invincible,' was
a Bodhisattva, the principal one, indeed, of Sakyamuni's retinue, but is not
counted among the ordinary (historical) disciples, nor is anything told of his
antecedents. It was in the Tushita heaven that Sakyamuni met him and
appointed him as his successor, to appear as Buddha after the lapse of 5000
years. IMaitreya is therefore the expected Messiah of the Buddhists, residing
at present in Tushita, and, according to the account of him in Eitel (H.,
p. 70), 'aheady controlling the propagation of the Buddhistic faith.' The
name means 'gentleness' or 'kindness;' and this will be the character of his
dispensation.
* The combination of A- ^^ in the text of this concluding sentence,
and so frequently occurring throughout the narrative, has occasioned no Uttle
dispute among previous translators. In the imperial thesaiurus of phraseology

(P'ei-wan Yun-foo), under ^^, an example of it is given from Chwang-tsze, and
a note subjoined that -^ ^[ is equivalent to 'g' -^^ '
anciently and now.'
i6 THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
CHAPTER VII.
CROSSING OF THE INDUS. WHEN BUDDHISM FIRST CROSSED THE

RIVER FOR THE EAST.
The travellers went on to the south-west for fifteen days (at the foot of
the mountains, and) following the course of their range. The way was
difficult and rugged, (running along) a bank exceedingly precipitous,
which rose up there, a hill-like wall of rock, 10,000 cubits from the base.
When one approached the edge of it, his eyes became unsteady and if he ;
wished to go forward in the same direction, there was no place on which

he could place his foot and beneath were the waters of the river called
;
the Indus^. In former times men had chiselled paths along the rocks, and
distributed ladders on the face of them, to the number altogether of 70°)
at the bottom of which there was a suspension bridge of ropes, by which
the river was crossed, its banks being there eighty paces apart ^. The (place
and arrangements) are to be found in the Records of the Nine Interpreters^,
'
The Sindhu. We saw in a former note (2, p. 14), that the earliest name in
China for India was Shin-tuh. So, here, the river Indus is called by a name
approaching that in sound.
^ Both Beal and Watters quote from Cunningham (Ladak, pp. 88, 89)
the following description of the course of the Indus in these parts, in striking
accordance with our author's account — From
:
' Skardo to Rongdo, and from
Rongdo to Makpou-i-shang-rong, for upwards of 100 miles, the Indus sweeps
sullen and dark through a mighty gorge in the mountains, which for wild
sublimity is perhaps unequalled. Rongdo means the country of defiles ....
Between these points the Indus raves from side to side of the gloomy chasm,
foaming and chafing with ungovernable fury. Yet even in these inaccessible
places has daring and ingenious man triumphed over opposing nature. The
yawning abyss is spanned by frail rope bridges, and the narrow ledges of
rocks are connected by ladders to form a giddy pathway overhanging the
seething caldron below.'
^ The Japanese edition has a different reading here from the Chinese
copies, — one which Remusat (with true critical instinct) conjectured should
take the place of the more difficult text with which alone he was acquainted.
The '
Nine Interpreters ' would be a general name for the official interpreters
WHEN BUDDHISM CROSSED THE INDUS. 27
but neither Chang K'een ^ nor Kan Ying - had reached the
spot.
The monks ^ asked Fa-hien if it could be known when the Law of
Buddha first went to the east. He repHed, '
When I asked the people
of those countries about it, they all said that it had been handed down by
their fathersfrom of old that, after the setting up of the image of Maitreya
Bodhisattva, there were Sramans of India who crossed this river, carrying
with them Sutras and Books of Discipline. Now the image was set up
rather more than 300 years after the nirvana* of Buddha, which may
be referred to the reign of king P'ing of the Chow dynasty'. According
attached to the invading armies of Han in their attempts to penetrate and

subdue the regions of the west. The phrase occurs in the memoir of Chang
K'een, referred to in the next note.
' Chang K'een, a minister of the emperor Woo of Han (b.c. 140-87), is
celebrated as the first Chinese who '

pierced the void,' and penetrated to '
the
regions of the west,' corresponding very much to the present Turkestan.
Through him, by b.c. 115, a regular intercourse was established between China
and the thirty-six kingdoms or states of that quarter see IMayers' Chinese ;
—
Reader's IManual, p. 5. The memoir of Chang K'een, translated by Mr. Wylie
from the Books of the first Han dynasty, appears in the Journal of the Anthropo-
logical Institute, referred to already (note 3, p. 12).
^ Less is known of Kan Ying than of Chang K'een. Being sent in a.d.
88 by his patron Pan Chao on an embassy to the Roman empire, he only

got as far as the Caspian sea, and returned to China. He extended, how-
ever, the knowledge of his countrymen with regard to the western regions ;
see the memoir of Pan Chao in the Books of the second Han, and Mayers'
Manual, pp. 167, 168.
' Where and when ? Probably at his first resting-place after crossing the
Indus.
* This may refer to Sakyamuni's becoming Buddha on attaining to nirvana,
or more probably to his pari-nirvana and death.
As king P'ing's
' reign lasted from b.c 750 to 719, this would place the
death of Buddha in the eleventh century B.C., whereas recent inquirers place it
between 480 and 470, a year or nvo, or a few years, after that of Confucius,
b.c.
so that the tno great Masters of the east were really contemporaries. But
'
'
if Rhys Da\ids be correct, as I think he is, in fixing the date of Buddha's death
a8 THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
to this account \vc may say that the diffusion of our great doctrines (in
the east) began from (the setting up of) this image. If it had not been
through that Maitreya^ the great spiritual master ^ (who is to be) the
successor of the Sakya, who could have caused the "Three Precious
Ones^" to be proclaimed so far, and the people of those border lands
to know our Law? We know of a truth that the opening of (the way
for such) a mysterious propagation is not the work of man ; and so the
dream of the emperor Ming of Han^ had its proper cause.'
CHAPTER VIII.
WOO-CHANG, OR UDYANA. MONASTERIES, AND THEIR WAYS. TRACES

OF BUDDHA.
After crossing the river, (the travellers) immediately came to the
kingdom of Woo-chang
which is indeed (a part) of North India. The
'",
people all use the language of Central India, Central India being what '
'
we should call the Middle Kingdom.' The food and clothes of the
'
common people are the same as in that Central Kingdom. The Law of
Buddha is very (flourishing in Woo-chang). They call the places where
the monks stay (for a time) or reside permanently Sangharamas";
and of these there are in all 500, the monks being all students of the
within a few years of 412 b.c. (see Manual, p. 213), not to speak of Westergaard's
still lower date, then the Buddha was very considerably the junior of Confucius.
' This confirms the words of Eitel (note 3, p. 23), that IMaitreya is already
controlling the propagadon of the Faith.
"^
The Chinese characters for this simply mean '
the great scholar or
officer;' but see Eitel's Handbook, p. 99, on the term purusha.
' 'The precious Buddha,' 'the precious Law,' and 'the precious Monkhood;'
Buddha, Dharma, and Sahgha; the whole being equivalent to Buddhism.
*
Fa-hien thus endorses the view that Buddhism was introduced into China
in this reign, a.d. 58-75. The emperor had his dream in a.d. 61.
;
^ Udyana, meaning '
the Park ' just north of the Punjab, the country along
the Subhavastu, now called the Swat ; noted for its forests, flowers, and fruits
(E. H., p. 153).

' See note 3, p. 17.
WOO-CHANG. 29
hinayana. When stranger bhikshus' arrive at one of them, their

wants are supplied for three days, after which they are told to find a
resting-place for themselves.
There is a tradition that when Buddha came to North India, he came
at once to this country, and that here he left a print of his foot, which is
long or short according to the ideas of the beholder (on the subject). It
exists,and the same thing is true about it, at the present day. Here
also are still to be seen the rock on which he dried his clothes, and
the place where he converted the wicked dragon ^. The rock is fourteen
cubits high, and more than twenty broad, with one side of it smooth.
Hwuy-king, Hwuy-tah, and Tao-ching went on ahead towards (the
place of) Buddha's shadow in the country of Nagara ^ but Fa-hien and ;
the others remained in Woo-chang, and kept the summer retreat *. That
over, they descended south, and arrived in the country of Soo-ho-to ^.
' Bhikshu is the name for a monk as 'living by alms,' a mendicant.

All bhikshus call themselves Sramans. Sometimes the two names are used
together by our author.
^ Naga is the Sanskrit name for the Chinese lung or dragon; often meaning
a snake, especially the boa. '
Chinese Buddhists,' says Eitel, p. 79, '
when
speaking of nagas as boa spirits, always represent them as enemies of mankind,
but when viewing them as deities of rivers, lakes, or oceans, they describe
them as piously The dragon, however,
inclined.' is in China the symbol
of the Sovereign and Sage, a use of it unknown in Buddhism, according
to which all nagas need to be converted in order to obtain a higher phase
of being. The use of the character too (|^), as here, in the sense of to '
convert,' is entirely Buddhistic. The six paramitas are the six virtues which
carry men across (|^) the great sea of life and death, as the sphere of
transmigration to nirvana. With regard to the particular conversion here,
Eitel (p. 11) says the Naga's name was Apatala, the guardian deity of
the Subhavastu river, and that he was converted by Sakyamuni shortly before
the death of the latter.
' In Chinese Na-k'eeh, an ancient kingdom and city on the southern
bank of the Cabul river, about thirty miles west of Jellalabad.
* We would seem now to be in
403.
^ Soo-ho-to has not been clearly identified. Beal says that later Buddhist
writers include it in Udyana. It must have been between the Indus and the
Swat. I suppose it was what we now call Swastene.
CHAPTER IX.
SOO-HO-TO. LEGEND OF BUDDHA.

In that country also Buddhism ' is flourishing. There is in it the
place where Sakra^, Ruler of Devas, in a former age^, tried the Bodhi-
sattva, by producing * a hawk (in pursuit of a) dove, when (the Bodhi-
' Buddhism stands for the two Chinese characters "j^ ]^, the Law of Buddha,' '
and to that rendering of the phrase, which is of frequent occurrence, I will in

general adhere. Buddhism is not an adequate rendering of them any more than
Christianity would be of to fiayyeXiov Xpto-roC. The Fa or Law is the equivalent of
dharma comprehending all in the first Basket of the Buddhist teaching, — as
Dr. Davids says (Hibbert Lectures, p. 44), 'its ethics and philosophy, and its system
of self-culture ;' with the theory of karma, it seems to me, especially underlying it.
It has been pointed out (Cunningham's '

Bhilsa Topes,' p. 102) that dharma is
the keystone of all king Priyadarsi or Asoka's edicts. The whole of them are
dedicated to the attainment of one object, 'the advancement of dharma, or
of the Law of Buddha.' His native Chinese afforded no better character than
^P or Law, by which our author could express concisely his idea of the
Buddhistic system, as '
a law of life,' a directory or system of Rules, by which
men could attain to the consummation of their being.
'^
Sakra is acommon name for the Brahmanic Indra, adopted by Buddhism
into the circle of its own great adherents; — it has been said, 'because of his
popularity.' He is generally styled, as here, T'een Ti, God or Ruler of '
Devas.' He is now the representative of the secular power, the valiant pro-
tector of the Buddhist body, but is looked upon as inferior to âkyamuni,
and every Buddhist saint. He appears several times in Fa-hien's narrative.
E. H., pp. 108 and 46.
' The Chinese character is
_
^S', '
formerly,' and is often, as in the first
sentence of the narrative, simply equivalent to that adverb. At other times it
means, as here, 'in a former age,' some pre-existent state in the time of a
former birth. The incident related is 'a Jataka story.'
* It occurs at once to a translator to render the characters ^dK 'j'-^ by 'changed
himself to.' Such is often their meaning in the sequel, but their use in chapter xxiv
LEGENDS OF BUDDHA. 31
sattva) cut off a piece of his own flesh, and (with ransomed the dove.
it)
After Buddha had attained to perfect wisdom and

in travelling about
^,
with his disciples (arrived at this spot), he informed them that this was
the place where he ransomed the dove with a piece of his own flesh. In
this way the people of the country became aware of the fact, and on the
spot reared a tope, adorned with layers^ of gold and silver plates.
CHAPTER X.
GANDHARA. LEGENDS OF BUDDHA.
The travellers, going downwards from this towards the east, in five
days came to the country of Gandhara the place where Dharma-vivar-',
dhana*, the son of Asoka°, ruled. When Buddha was a Bodhisattva,

he gave his eyes also for another man here^ and at the spot they have ;
may be considered as a crucial test of the meaning which I have given to

them here.
' That is, had become Buddha, or completed his course (fiJT ^g" ).
' This seems to be the contribution of j^ (or Jtfj^, to the force of the
binomial j^ •0fe, which is continually occurring.

' Eitel says 'an ancient kingdom, corresponding to the region about Dheri
and Banjour.' But see note i on next page.
* Dharma-vivardhana is the name in Sanskrit, represented by the Fa Yi
(^ ^) of the text.
^ Asoka is here mentioned for the first time —

the Constantine of the Buddhist
;
society, and famous for the number of viharas and topes which he erected.
He was the grandson of Chandragupta (i.q. Sandracottus), a rude adventurer, who

at one time was a refugee in the camp of Alexander the Great; and within about
twenty years afterwards drove the Greeks out of India, having defeated Seleucus,
the Greek ruler of the Indus provinces. He had by that time made himself king
of Magadha. His grandson was converted Buddhism by
and patient
to the bold
demeanour of an Arhat whom he had ordered to be buried alive, and became a
most zealous supporter of the new faith. Dr. Rhys Davids (Sacred Books of the
East, vol. xi, p. xlvi) says that '
Asoka's coronation can be fixed with absolute
certainty within a year or two either way of 267 b.c'
^ This also is a Jataka story ; but Eitel thinks it may be a myth, constructed
from the story of the blinding of Dharma-vivardhana.
32 THE TRAVELS OF FA-HIEN.
also reared a large tope, adorned with layers of gold and silver plates.
The people of the country were mostly students of the hinayana.
CHAPTER XL
takshaîlA. legends, the four great topes.
Seven days' journey from this to the east brought the travellers to
the kingdom of Takshaîla*, which means 'the severed head' in the
language of China. Here, when Buddha was a Bodhisattva, he gave
away his head to a man^; and from this circumstance the kingdom got
itsname.
Going on further for two days to the east, they came to the place
where the Bodhisattva threw down his body to feed a starving tigress^.
—
'^
fc these two places also large topes have been built, both adorned with
layers of all the precious substances. The kings, ministers, and peoples
of the kingdoms around vie with one another in making offerings at
them. The trains of those who come to scatter flowers and light lamps
at them never cease. The nations of those quarters call those (and the
other two mentioned before) '
the four great topes.'
' See Julian's '

M^thode pour d^chiffrer at transcrira las Noms Sanscrits,' p. 206.
Eitel says, '

The Taxila of the Greeks, the region near Hoosun Abdaul in lat.
35° 48' N., Ion. 72° 44' E. But this identification, I am satisfied, is wrong.
Cunningham, indeed, takes credit ('Ancient Geography of India,' pp. 108, 109)
for determining this to be the site of Arrian's Taxila, — in the upper Punjab, still
existing in the ruins of Shahdheri, between the Indus and Hydaspes (the modern
Jhelum). So far he may be correct ; but the Takshasila of Fa-hien was on the
other, or western side of the Indus ; and between the river and Gandhara. It
took him, indeed, seven days travelling eastwards to reach it ; but we do not know
what stoppages he may have made on the way. We must be wary in reckoning
distances from his specifications of days.
''
Two Jataka stories. See the account of the latter in Spence Hardy's Manual '
of Buddhism,' pp. 91, 92. It took place when Buddha had been born as a
Brahman in the village of DaUddi ; and from the merit of the act, he was next
born in a devaloka.
PC'RL'SNAPUJiA, OR PESHAWUR. ^^
CHAPTER XII.
PURUSHAPURA, OR PESHAnYUR. PROPHECY ABOUT KING KANISHKA

AND HIS TOPE. BUDDHA'S ALMS-B0\YL. DEATH OF H\YUY-YING.
Going southwards from Gandhara, (the travellers) in four days
arrived at the kingdom of Purushapura'. Formerly, when Buddha was
travelling in this country with his disciples, he said to Ananda", 'After
my pari-nirvana^, there be a king named Kanishka*, who shall
w'ill
on this spot build a tope.' This Kanishka was afterwards born into the
world ; and (once), when he had gone forth to look about him,
' The modern Peshawur, lat. 34° 8' N., Ion. 71° 30' E.
^ A first cousin of Sakyamuni, and born at the moment when he attained to
Buddhaship. Under Buddha's teaching, Ananda became an Arhat, and is famous
for his strong and accurate memory and he played an important part at the
;
first council for the formation of the Buddhist canon. The friendship between
Sakyamuni and Ananda was very close and tender and ; it is impossible to read
much of what the dying Buddha said to him and of him, as related in the Jlaha-
pari-nirvana Sutra, without being moved almost to tears. Ananda is to reappear
on earth as Buddha in another Kalpa. See E. H., p. 9, and the Sacred Books of
the East, vol. xi.
* On his attaining to nirvana, Sakyamuni became the Buddha, and had no

longer to mourn his being within the circle of transmigration, and could rejoice in
an absolute freedom from passion, and a perfect purity. Still he continued to live
on for forty-five years, till he attained to pari-nirvana, and had done with all the life
of sense and societ}', and had no more exercise of thought. He died ; but whether he
absolutely and entirely ceased to be, in any sense of the word being, it would be
diflBcult to say. Probably he himself would not and could not have spoken
definitely on the point. So far as our use of language is concerned, apart from any
assured faith in and hope of immortahty, his pari-nirvana was his death.
* Kanishka appeared, and began to reign, early in our first century, about a.d.
10. He was the last of three brothers, whose original seat was in Yiieh-she,
immediately mentioned, or Tukhara. Converted by the sudden appearance of a
saint, he became a zealous Buddhist, and patronised the system as liberally as
Asoka had done. The finest topes in the north-west of India are ascribed to
him he was certainly a great man and
; a magnificent sovereign.
f
Sakra, Ruler of Devas, wishing to excite the idea in his mind, assumed
the appearance of a little herd-boy, and was making a tope right in the
way (of the king), who asked what sort of a thing he was making.
The boy said, I am making a tope for Buddha.'
'
The king said, Very '
good and immediately, right over the boy's tope, he (proceeded to)
;
'
rear another, which was more than four hundred cubits high, and adorned
with layers of all the precious substances. Of all the topes and temples
which (the travellers) saw in their journeyings, there was not one
comparable to this in solemn beauty and majestic grandeur. There
is a current saying that this is the finest tope in Jambudvipa When '.
the king's tope was completed, the little tope (of the boy) came out
from its side on the south, rather more than three cubits in height.
Buddha's alms-bowl is in this country. Formerly, a king of Yiieh-
she^ raised a large force and invaded this country, wishing to carry the
bowl away. Having subdued the kingdom, as he and his captains were
sincere believers in the Law of Buddha, and wished to carry off the
bowl, the\- proceeded to present their offerings on a great scale. When
they had done so to the Three Precious Ones, he made a large elephant
be grandly caparisoned, and placed the bowl upon it. But the elephant
knelt down on the ground, and was unable to go forward. Again he
caused a four-wheeled waggon to be prepared in which the bowl was put
to be conveyed away. Eight elephants were then yoked to it, and
dragged it with their united strength but neither were they able to
;
' Jambudvipa is one of the four great continents of the universe, representing
the inhabited world as fancied by the Buddhists, and so called because it re-
sembles in shape the leaves of the jambu tree. It is south of mount Meru, and
divided among four fabulous kings (E. H., p. 36). It is often used, as here
perhaps, merely as the Buddhist name for India.
' This king was perhaps Kanishka himself, Fa-hien mixing up, in an
inartistic way, different legends about him. Eitel suggests that a relic of the old
name of the country may still exist in that of the Jats or Juts of the present day.
A more common name for it is Tukhara, and he observes that the people were the
Indo-Scythians of the Greeks, and the Tartars of Chinese writers, who, driven on
by the Huns (180 B.C.), conquered Transoxiana, destroyed the Bactrian kingdom
(126 B.C.), and finally conquered the Punjab, Cashmere, and great part of India,
their greatest king being Kanishka (E. H., p. 152).
THE BUDDHA'S ALMS-BOWL. 35
go forward. The king knew that the time for an association between him-
selfand the bowl had not yet arrived^, and was sad and deeply ashamed
of himself. Forthwith he built a tope at the place and a monastery,
and left a guard to watch (the bowl), making all sorts of contributions.
There may be there more than seven hundred monks. When it is
near midday, they bring out the bowl, and, along with the common
people', make which they take their
their various offerings to it, after
midday meal. In the evening, at the time of incense, they bring the
bowl out again '. It may contain rather more than two pecks, and is of
various colours, black predominating, with the seams that show its
fourfold composition distinctly marked *. Its thickness is about the fifth
of an inch, and it has a bright and glossy lustre. When poor people
throw into it a few flowers, it becomes immediately full, while some
very rich people, wishing to make offering of many flowers, might not
stop till they had thrown in hundreds, thousands, and myriads of
bushels, and yet would not be able to fill if''.
'
Walters, clearly understanding the thought of the author in this sentence,
renders — ' his destiny did not e.\tend to a connexion with the bowl
;
' but the term
'
destiny' suggests a controlling or directing power without. The king thought that
his virtue in the past was not yet sufficient to give him possession of the bowl.
The text is simply those in white clothes.' This may mean the laity,' or
^ ' '
the 'upasakas ;' but it is better to take the characters in their common Chinese
acceptation, as meaning commoners,' men who have no rank.'
' '
See in Williams'
Dictionary under j^.
' I do not wonder that Rdmusat should give for this— 'et s'en retournent
aprbs.' But Fa-hien's use of 'W in the sense of '
in the same way ' is uniform
throughout the narrative.
* Hardy's M. B., p. 183, says:
— 'The alms-bowl, given by Mahabrahma,
having vanished (about the time that Gotama became Buddha), each of the
four guardian deities brought him an alms-bowl of emerald, but he did not accept
them. They then brought four bowls made of stone, of the colour of the mung
fruit ; and when each entreated that his own bowl might be accepted, Buddha
caused them to appear as if formed into a single bowl, appearing at the upper rim
as if placed one within the other.' See the account more correctly given in the
'
Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 110.
° Compare the narrative in Luke's Gospel, xxi. 1-4.
f 2
36 THE TRA VELS OF FA -HIEN.
Pao-yun and Sang-king here merely made their offerings to the alms-
bowl, and (then resolved to) go back. Hwuy-king, Hwuy-tah, and Tao-
ching had gone on before the rest to Nagara^, to make their offerings
at (the places of) Buddha's shadow, tooth, and the flat-bone of his skull.
(There) Hwuy-king fell ill, and Tao-ching remained to look after him,
while Hwuy-tah came alone to Purushapura, and saw the others, and
(then) he with Pao-yun and Sang-king took their way back to the
land of Ts'in. Hwuy-king^ came to his end ^ in the monastery of
Buddha"s alms-bowl, and on this Fa-hien went forward alone towards
the place of the flat-bone of Buddha's skull.
CHAPTER XHI.
NAGARA. FESTIVAL OF BUDDHA'S SKULL-BONE. OTHER RELICS, AND
HIS SHADOW.
Going west for sixteen yojanas*, he came to the city He-lo ^ in

the borders of the country of Nagara, where there is the flat-bone of
Buddha's skull, deposited in a vihara^ adorned all over with gold-leaf
' See chapter \iii.
° This, no doubt, should be Hwuy-ying. King was at this time ill in Nagara, and
indeed afterwards he dies in crossing the Little Snowy Mountains but all the ;
texts make him die twice. The confounding of the two names has been pointed
out by Chinese critics.
' '
Came to his end
;
' i. e., according to the test, '
proved the impermanence
and uncertainty,' namely, of human life. See Williams' Dictionary under
•&. The phraseology is wholly Buddhistic.
* Now in India, Fa-hien used the Indian measure of distance; but it is not
possible to determine exactly what its length then was. The estimates of it are
very different, and vary from four and a half or five miles to seven, and sometimes
more. See the subject exhaustively treated in Davids' '
Ceylon Coins and
Measures,' pp. 15-17.
° The present Hidda, west of Fesha^Tir, and five miles south of Jellalabad.
* The vihara,' says Hardy,
' '
is the residence of a recluse or priest;' and so
Davids — the :
' clean little hut where the mendicant lives.' Our author, however,
does not use the Indian name here, but the Chinese characters which express its
meaning tsing shay, 'a pure dwelling.' He uses the term occasionally, and
NAGAJÂ. THE BUDDHA:S SKULL-BOXE. 37
and the seven sacred substances. The king of the country, revering
and honouring the bone, and anxious lest it should be stolen away,
has selected eight individuals, representing the great families in the
kingdom, and committed to each a seal, with which he should seal (its
shrine) and guard (the relic). At early dawn these eight men come, and
after each has inspected his seal, they open the door. This done, they
wash their hands with scented water and bring out the bone, which they
place outside the vihara, on a lofty platform, where it is supported on
a round pedestal of the seven precious substances, and covered with a
bell of lapis lazuli, both adorned with rows of pearls. Its colour is of
a yellowish white, and it forms an imperfect circle twelve inches round \
curving upwards to the centre. Every day, after it has been brought
forth, the keepers of the vihara ascend a high gallery, where they beat
great drums, blow conchs, and clash their copper cymbals. When the
king hears them, he goes to the vihara, and makes his offerings of
flowers and incense. When he has done this, he (and his attendants) in
order, one after another, (raise the bone), place it (for a moment) on
the top of their heads-, and then depart, going out by the door on the
west as they had entered by that on the east. The king every morning
makes his offerings and performs his worship, and afterwards gives
evidently^ in this sense more frequently it occurs in his narrative in connexion with
;
the Buddhist relic worship; and at first I translated it by 'shrine' and shrine-house;' '
but I came to the conclusion, at last, to employ always the Indian name. The first
time I saw a shrine-house was, I think, in a monastery near Foo-chow ;
—a small
pyramidal structure, about ten feet high, glittering as if with the precious substances,
but all, it seemed to me, of tinsel. It was in a large apartment of the building,
having many images in it. The monks said was the most precious thing in their
it
possession, and that if they opened it, as I begged them to do, there would be a
convulsion that would destroy the whole establishment. See E. H., p. 166. The
name of the province of Behar was given to it in consequence of its many v i h a r a s.
' According to the characters, '
square, round, four inches.' Hsiian-chwang
says it was twelve inches round.
* In Williams' Dictionary, under fS, the characters, used here, are employed
in the phrase for to degrade an ofiicer,' that is, to remove the token of his rank
' '
worn on crown of his head ;' but to place a thing on the crown is a Buddhistic
the
form of religious homage.
audience on the business of his government. The chiefs of the Vai^yas'
also make their offerings before they attend to their family affairs.
Every day it is so, and there no remissness in the observance of the

is
custom. When all the offerings are over, they replace the bone in the
vihara, where there is a vimoksha tope^, of the seven precious sub-
stances, and rather more than five cubits high, sometimes open, some-
times shut, to contain it. In front of the door of the vihara, there are
parties who every morning sell flowers and incense ^, and those who wish
to make offerings buy some of all kinds. The kings of various countries
are also constantly sending messengers with offerings. The vihara
stands in a square of thirty paces, and though heaven should shake and
earth be rent, this place would not move.
Going on, north a yojana, (Fa-hien) arrived at the
from this, for
capital of Nagara, the place where the Bodhisattva once purchased with
money five stalks of flowers, as an offering to the Dipahkara Buddha*.
In the midst of the city there is also the tope of Buddha's tooth, where
offerings are made in the same way as to the flat-bone of his skull.
A yojana to the north-east of the city brought him to the mouth of
a valley, where there is Buddha's pewter staff '^ ; and a vihara also has
' The Vaisyas, or bourgeois caste of Hindu society, are described here as
'
resident scholars.'
^ See Eitel's Handbook under the name vimoksha, which is explained as
'
the act of self-liberation,' and '
the dwelling or state of liberty.' There are eight
acts of liberating one's self from all subjective and objective trammels, and as
many states of liberty (vimukti) resulting therefrom. They are eight degrees of
and apparently eight stages on the way to nirvana. The tope in
self-inanition,
the text would be emblematic in some way of the general idea of the mental
progress conducting to the Buddhisdc consummation of existence.
' This incense would be in long sticks,' small and large, such as are sold
'
to-day throughout China, as you enter the temples.

* '
The illuminating Buddha,' the twenty-fourth predecessor of Sakyamuni,
and who, so long before, gave him the assurance that he would by-and-by be
Buddha. See Jataka Tales, p. 23.
^ The staff was, as immediately appears, of Goslrsha Chandana, or
'
sandal-wood from the Cow's-head mountain,' a species of copper-brown sandal-
BUDDHA'S STAFF, ROBE, AND SHADOW. 39
been which offerings are made. The staff is made of Gosirsha

built at
Chandana, and is quite sixteen or seventeen cubits long. It is con-
tained in a wooden tube, and though a hundred or a thousand men
were to (try to) lift it, they could not move it.
Entering the mouth of the valley, and going west, he found Buddha's
Sahghali*, where also there is reared a vihara, and offerings are made.
It is a custom of the country when there is a great drought, for
the people to collect in crowds, bring out the robe, pay worship to it,
and make offerings, on which there is immediately a great rain from
the sky.
South of the city, half a yojani. there is a rock-cavern, in a great
hill fronting the south-west ;was that Buddha left his
and here it
shadow. Looking at it from a distance of more thai ten paces, you

seem to see Buddha's real form, with his complexion of gold, and his
characteristic marks - in their nicety clearly and brightly displayed.
The nearer you approach, however, the fainter it becomes, as if it were
only in your fancy. When the kings from the regions all around have
sent skilful artists to take a copy, none of them have been able to do so.
Among the people of the country there is a saying current that '
the
thousand Buddhas^ must all leave their shadows here.'
Rather more than four hundred paces west from the shadow, when
Buddha was at the spot, he shaved off his hair and dipt his nails, and
proceeded, along with his disciples, to build a tope seventy or eighty
wood, said to be produced most abundantly on a mountain of (the fabulous

continent) Ullarakuru, north of mount Meru, which resembles in shape the head
of a cow (E. H., pp. 42, 43). It is called a pewter staff from having on it a head
'
'
and rings of pewter. See Watters, 'China Review,' viii, pp. 227, 228, and
Williams' Dictionary, under ijT-
' Or Sahghati, the double or composite robe, part of a monk's attire, reaching
from the shoulders to the knees, and fastened round the waist (E. H., p. 118).
^ These were the '
marks and beauties ' on the person of a supreme Buddha.
The rishi Kali Devala saw them on the body of the infant Sakya prince to the
number of 328, those on the teeth, which had not yet come out, being visible to his
spirit-like eyes (M. B., pp. 148, 149).
' Probablv = 'allBuddhas.'
cubits high, to be a model for all future topes ; and it is still existing.
By the side of it there is a monastery, with more than seven hundred
monks in it. At this place there are as many as a thousand topes ^
of Arhans and Pratyeka Buddhas ^.
CHAPTER XIV.
DEATH OF HWUY-KING THE LITTLE SNOWY MOUNTAINS.

IN LO-E.
POHNA. CROSSING THE INDUS TO THE EAST.
Having stayed there till the third month of winter, Fa-hien and the
two others ',
proceeding southwards, crossed the Little Snowy mountains*.
On them the snow lies accumulated both winter and summer. On the
north (side) of the mountains, in the shade, they suddenly encountered a
cold wind which made them shiver and become unable to speak. Hwuy-
king could not go any farther. A white froth came from his mouth,
^ The number may appear too great. But see what is said on the size of
topes in note i, page 17.
^ In Singhalese, Pase Buddhas; called also Nidana Buddhas, and Pra-
tyeka Jinas, and explained by '
individually intelligent,' ' completely intelligent,'
'
intelligent as regards the nidanas.' This, says Eitel (pp. 96, 97), is 'a degree of
saintship unknown to primitive Buddhism, denoting automats in ascetic life who
attain to Buddhaship " individually," that is, without a teacher, and without being
able to save others. As the ideal hermit, the Pratyeka Buddha is compared with
the rhinoceros khadga that lives lonely in the wilderness. He is also called Nidana
Buddha, as having mastered the twelve nidanas (the twelve links in the everlast-
ing chain of cause and effect in the whole range of existence, the understanding
of which solves the riddle of life, revealing the inanity of all forms of existence,
and preparing the mind for nirvana). He is also compared to a horse, which,
crossing a river, almost buries its body under the water, without, however, touching
the bottom of the river. Thus in crossing samsara he " suppresses the errors of
life and thought, and the effects of habit and passion, without attaining to absolute
perfection." ' Whether these Buddhas were unknown, as Eitel says, to primitive
Buddhism, may be doubted. See Davids' Hibbert Lectures, p. 146.
' These must have been Tao-ching and Hwuy-king.
* Probably the Safeid Koh, and on the way to the Kohat pass.
CHOSS/XG THE INDUS INTO THE PUXJAB. 41
and he said to Fa-hien, I cannot live any longer. Do you immediately

'
;
go away, that we do not all die here and with these words he '
died ^ Fa-hien stroked the corpse, and cried out piteously, Our '
original plan has failed; it is fate''^. —

What can we do?' He then
again exerted himself, and they succeeded in crossing to the south of the
range, and arrived in the kingdom of Lo-e ^ where there were nearly three
thousand monks, students of both the mahayana and hinayana.
Here they stayed for the summer retreat*, and when that was over, they
went on to the south, and ten days' journey brought them to the
kingdom of Poh-na ^ where there are also more than three thousand
monks, all students of the hinayana. Proceeding from this place for
three days, they again crossed the Indus, where the country on each
side was low and level ''.
CHAPTER XV.
BHIDA. SYMPATHY OF MONKS WITH THE PILGRIMS.
After they had crossed the river, there was a country named
Pe-t'oo where Buddhism was very flourishing, and (the monks) studied
'',
both the mahayana and hinayana. When they saw their fellow-
disciples from Ts'in passing along, they were moved with great pity and
sympathy, and expressed themselves thus :
'
How is it that these men
' AU the texts have Hwuy-king. See note 2, page 36.

^ A very natural exclamation, but out of place and inconsistent from the lips
of Fa-hien. The Chinese character -m, which he employed, may be rendered
rightly by '
fate ' or ' destiny
;
' but the fate is not unintelligent. The term implies a
factor, or fa- tor, and supposes the ordination of Heaven or God. A Confucian
idea for the moment overcame his Buddhism.
' Lo-e, or Rohi, is a name for Afghanistan ; but only a portion of it can be
here intended.
* We are now therefore in 404.
° No doubt the present district of Bannu, in the Lieutenant-Governorship of
the Punjab, betweei; 32° 10' and 33° 15' N. lat., and 70° 26' and 72° E. Ion. See
Hunter's Gazetteer of India, i, p. 393.
^ They had then crossed the Indus before. They had done so, indeed, twice: first,
from north to south, at Skardo or east of it; and second, as described in chap. vii.
"
Bhida. Eitel says, 'The present Punjab ;' i.e. it was a portion of that.
g
from a border-land should have learned to become monks \ and come for
the sake of our doctrines from such a distance in search of the Law of
Buddha?' They supplied them with what they needed, and treated
them in accordance with the rules of the Law.
CHAPTER XVL
ON TO MATHURA OR MUTTRA. CONDITION AND CUSTOMS OF CENTRAL
INDIA OF THE MONKS, VIHARAS, AND MONASTERIES.
;
From this place they travelled south-east, passing by a succession of

very many monasteries, with a multitude of monks, who might be counted
by myriads. After passing all these places, they came to a country named
Ma-t'aou-lo 2. They still on
followed the course of the P'oo-na ^ river,
the banks of which, and right, there were twenty monasteries, which
left
might contain three thousand monks and (here) the Law of Buddha ;
was still more flourishing. Everywhere, from the Sandy Desert, in

all the countries of India, the kings had been firm believers in that Law.
When they make their offerings to a community of monks, they take off
their royal caps, and along with their relatives and ministers, supply
them with food with their own hands. That done, (the king) has a
carpet spread for himself on the ground, and sits down on it in front of
the chairman —
they dare not presume to sit on couches in front of the
;
community. The laws and ways, according to which the kings presented
their offerings when Buddha was in the world, have been handed down to
the present day.
All south from this is named the Middle Kingdom *. In it the cold and
heat are finely tempered, and there is neither hoarfrost nor snow. The
people are numerous and happy; they have not to register their
households, or attend to any magistrates and their rules only those who ;
^ '
To come forth from their families ; ' that is, to become celibates, and adopt
the tonsure.
"^
Muttra,'the peacock city;' lat. 27° 30' N., Ion. 77° 43' E. (Hunter); the birth-
place of Krishna, whose emblem is the peacock.
' This must be the Jumna, or Yamuna. Why it is called, as here, the P'oo-na
has yet to be explained.
* In pan, Majjhima-desa, '
the Middle Country.' See Davids' '
Buddhist Birth
Stories,' page 6r, note.
CC'STOJ/S OF MID-INDIA. 43
cultivate the royal land have to pay (a portion of) the gain from it. If they
want to go, they go ; if they want to stay on, they stay. The king governs
without decapitation or (other) corporal punishments. Criminals are
simply fined, lightly or heavily, according to the circumstances (of each
case). Even in cases of repeated attempts at wicked rebellion, they only
have their right hands cut offi The king's body-guards and attendants all
have salaries. Throughout the whole country the people do not kill any
living creature, nor drink intoxicating liquor, nor eat onions or garlic.
The only exception is that of the Chandalas^. That is the name for
thosewho are (held to be) wicked men, and live apart from others.
When they enter the gate of a city or a market-place, they strike a piece
of wood to make themselves known, so that men know and avoid them,
and do not come into contact with them. In that country they do not
keep pigs and fowls, and do not sell live cattle in the markets there ;
are no butchers' shops and no dealers in intoxicating drink. In buying

and selling commodities they use cowries-. Only the Chandalas are
fishermen and hunters, and sell flesh meat.
After Buddha attained to pari-nirvana^ the kings of the various
countries and the heads of the Vaisyas* built viharas for the priests,
and endowed them with fields, houses, gardens, and orchards, along with
the resident populations and their cattle, the grants being engraved on
plates of metal ', so that afterwards they were handed down from king
to king, without any one daring to annul them, and they remain even to
the present time.
'
Eitel (pp. 145, 6) says, 'The name Chandalas is explained by "butchers,"
" wicked men," and those who carry " the awful flag," to warn oflf their betters ;
the lowest and most despised caste of India, members of which, however, when
converted, were admitted even into the ranks of the priesthood.'
'^
'CowTies;' ^ '\M, not
cowries alone, the second term entering into the
'shells and ivory,' as
name from
one might
the
suppose;
marks inside the
but
edge of the shell, resembling '

the teeth of fishes.'
^ See note 3, page 33, Buddha's pari-nirvana is equivalent to Buddha's death.
* See note i, page 38. The order of the characters is different here, but with
the same meaning.
° See the preparadon of such a deed of grant in a special case, as related in
chap, xxxix. No doubt in Fa-hien's time, and long before and after it, it was
the custom to engrave such deeds on plates of metal.
g2
The regular business of the monks is to perform acts of meritorious
virtue, and to recite their Sutras and sit wrapt in meditation. When
stranger monks arrive (at any monastery), the old residents meet and
receive them, carry for them their clothes and alms-bowl, give them water
to wash which to anoint them, and the liquid food per-
their feet, oil with
mitted out of the regular hours ^. When (the stranger) has enjoyed a
very brief rest, thej' further ask the number of years that he has been
a monk, after which he receives a sleeping apartment with its appur-
tenances, according to his regular order, and everything is done for him
which the rules prescribe ".
Where a community of monks resides, they erect topes to Sariputtra ^,
to Maha-maudgalyayana *, and to Ananda', and also topes (in honour) of
' '
No monk can eat solid food except betsveen sunrise and noon,' and total
abstinence from intoxicating drinks is obligatory (Davids' ]Manual, p. 163). Food

eaten at any other part of the day is called vikala, and forbidden; but a weary
traveller might receive unseasonable refreshment, consisting, as Watters has shown
(Ch. Rev. viii. 282), of honey, butter, treacle, and sesamum oil.
^ The expression here is somewhat perplexing; but it occurs again in chap, xxxviii
and the meaning is clear. See Watters, Ch. Rev. viii. 282,3. The rules are given at
length in the Sacred Books of p. 279 and foil.
the East, vol. xx, p. 272 and foil., and
' Sariputtra was one of the principal disciples of Buddha,
(Singh. Serijut)
and indeed the most learned and ingenious of them all, so that he obtained the
title of
:^ ^, 'knowledge and wisdom.' He is also called Buddha's 'right-hand
attendant.' His name is derived from that of his mother ârika, the wife of
Tishya, a native of Nalanda. In Spence Hardy, he often appears under the
name of Upatissa (Upa-tishya), derived from his father. Several Sastras are
ascribed to him, and indeed the followers of the Abhidharma look on him as their
founder. He died before Sakyamuni; but is to reappear as a future Buddha.
Eitel, pp. 123, 124.
* Mugalan, the Singhalese name of this disciple, is more pronounceable. He
also was one of the principal disciples, called Buddha's '
left-hand attendant.' He
was distinguished for his power of vision, and his magic powers. The name in
the text is derived from the former attribute, and
was by the latter that he took it
up an artist to Tushita to get a view of Sakyamuni, and so make a statue of him.

(Compare the similar story in chap, vi.) He went to hell, and released his mother.
He also died before Sakyamuni, and is to reappear as Buddha. Eitel, p. 65.
' See note 2, page 33.
WAVS OF THE MONKISH COMMUNITIES. 45
the Abhidharma', the Vinaya', and the Sutras ^ A month after the
(annual season of) rest, the famihes which are looking out for blessing
stimulate one another^ to make offerings to the monks, and send
round
to them the liquid food which may be taken out of the ordinary hours.
All the monks come together in a great assembly, and preach the Law^;
after which offerings are presented at the tope of Sariputtra, with all
kinds of flowers and incense. All through the night lamps are kept
burning, and skilful musicians are employed to perform ^.
When Sariputtra was a great Brahman, he went to Buddha, and

begged (to be permitted) to quit his family (and become a monk). The
great Mugalan and the great Kasyapa^ also did the same. The bhik-
shunis'' for the most part make their offerings at the tope of Ananda,
because it was he who requested the World-honoured one to allow females
to quit their families (and become nuns). The Sramaneras'' mostly
' The different parts of the tripitaka. See note 2, page 10.
'^
A passage rather difficult to construe. The '
families ' would be those
more devout than their neighbours.
' One rarely hears this preaching in China. It struck me most as I once
heard it at Osaka in Japan. There was a pulpit in a large hall of the temple,
and the audience sat around on the matted floor. One priest took the pulpit
after another ; and the hearers nodded their heads occasionally, and indicated
their sympathy with a sentiment now and then by an audible '
h'm,' which
reminded me of Carlyle's description of meetings of '
The Ironsides ' of
Cromwell.
^ This last statement is wanting in the Chinese editions.
^ There was a Kasyapa Buddha, anterior to Sakyamuni. But this Mahd-
kasyapa was a Brahman of Magadha, who was converted by Buddha, and became
one of his disciples. He took the lead after Sakyamuni's death, convoked
and directed the first synod, from which his title of Arya-sthavira is derived.
As the first compiler of the Canon, he is considered the fountain of Chinese

orthodoxy, and counted as the first patriarch. He also is to^be reborn as a
Buddha. Eitel, p. 64.
* The bhikshunis are the female monks or nuns, subject to the same rules
as the bhikshus, and also to special ordinances of restraint. See Hardy's E. M.,
chap. 17. See also Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, p. 321.
' The Sramaneras are the novices, male or female, who have vowed to
make their offerings to Rahula ^. The professors of the Abhidharma -
make their offerings to it ; those of the Vinaya- to it. Every year there
is one such offering, and each class has its own day for it. Students of
the mahayana present offerings to the Prajna-paramita ^, to Manjusri*,
and to Kwan-she-yin ®. When the monks have done receiving their
observe the Shikshapada, or ten commandments. Fa-hien was himself one of

them from his childhood. Having heard the Trisharana, or threefold
formula of Refuge, — ' I take refuge in Buddha ; the Law ; the Church, — the
novice undertakes to observe the ten precepts that forbid — (i) destroying hfe
(2) stealing; (3) impurity; (4) lying; (5) intoxicating drinks; (6) eating after
midday ; (7) dancing, singing, music, and stage-plays ; (8) garlands, scents,
unguents, and ornaments; (9) high or broad couches; (10) receiving gold or
silver.' Davids' Manual, p. 160; Hardy's E. M., pp. 23, 24.
^ The eldest son of Sakyamuni by Yasodhara. Converted to Buddhism, he
followed his father as an attendant ; and
Buddha's death became^he founder
after
of a philosophical realistic school (vaibhashika). He is now revered as the

patron saint of all novices, and is to be reborn as the eldest son of every future
Buddha. Eitel, p. loi. His mother also is to be reborn as Buddha.
^ Note I, page 45.
' There are six (sometimes increased to ten) pa ram it as, 'means of passing
to nirvana : — Charity ; morality ;
patience ; energy ; tranquil contemplation ;
wisdom (prajna); made up to ten by use of the proper means; science; pious
vows; and force of purpose. But it is only prajna which carries men across the
samsara to the shores of nirvana.' Eitel, p. 90.
* According to 'A famous Bodhisattva, now specially
Eitel (pp. 71, 72),
worshipped whose \antecedents are a hopeless jumble of history and
in Shan-se,
fable. Fa-hien found him here worshipped by followers of the mahayana

school; but Hsiian-chwang connects his worship with the yogachara or
tantra-magic school. The mahayana school regard him as the apotheosis of
perfect wisdom. His most common titles are Mahamati, "Great wisdom," and
Kumara-raja, "King of teaching, with a thousand arms and a hundred alms-
'
bowls."
^ Kwan-she-yin and the dogmas about him or her are as great a mystery as
Manjusri. The Chinese name is a mistranslation of the Sanskrit name Avalo-
kitesvara, 'On-looking Sovereign,' or even 'On-looking Self- Existent,'
and means 'Regarding or Looking on the sounds of the world,' = '
Hearer of
Prayer.' Originally, and still in Thibet, Avalokitesvara had only male attributes,
SAiXÂSFA. 47
annual tribute (from the harvests)', the Heads of the Vaisyas and all
the Brahmans bring clothes and such other articles as the monks
require for use, and distribute among them. The monks, having received
them, also proceed to give portions to one another. From the nin,'ana
of Buddha-, the forms of ceremony, laws, and rules, practised by the
sacred communities, have been handed down from one generation to
another without interruption.
From the place where (the travellers) crossed the Indus to South India,
and on to the Southern Sea, a distance of forty or fifty thousand le, all
is level plain. There are no large hills with streams (among them)
there are simply the waters of the rivers.
CHAPTER XVII.
sankAsya. Buddha's ascent to and descent from the

trayastrimsas heaven, and other legends.
From this they proceeded south-east for eighteen yojanas, and found
themselves in a kingdom called Sankasya^ at the placewhere Buddha came
but in China and Japan (Kwannon), this deity (such popularly she is) is repre-
sented as a woman, '
Kwan-yin, the greatly gentle, with a thousand arms and a
thousand eyes; ' and has her principal seat in the island of Foo-t'oo, on the China
coast, which is a regular place of pilgrimage. To the worshippers of whom Fa-
hien speaks, Kwan-she-yin would only be Avalokite'vara. How he was con-
verted into the '
goddess of mercy,' and her worship took the place which it now
has in China, is a difficult inquir)% which would take much time and space, and
not be brought after all, so far as I see, to a satisfactory conclusion. See Eitel's
Handbook, pp. 18-20, and his Three Lectures on Buddhism (third edition),
pp. 1 24-131. I was talking on the subject once with an intelligent Chinese
gentleman, when he remarked, Have you not much the same thing in Europe in
'
the worship of Mary ?

Compare what is said in chap. v.
^ This nirvana of Buddha must be — not his death, but his attaining to
Buddhaship.
' The name is still remaining in Samkassam, a village forty-five miles north-
west of Canouge, lat. 27° 3' N., Ion. 79° 50' E.

down, after ascending to the Trayastrimsas heaven^, and there preaching
for three months his Law for the benefit of his mother'-. Buddha had gone
up heaven by his supernatural power^, without letting his disciples
to this
know but seven days before the completion (of the three months) he laid
;
aside his invisibility^, and Anuruddha*, with his heavenly eyes*, saw the
World-honoured one, and immediately said to the honoured one, the
great Mugalan, ' Do you go and salute the World-honoured one.' Mugalan
forthwith went, and with head and face did homage at (Buddha's) feet.
They then saluted and questioned each other, and when this was over,
Buddha said to Mugalan, Seven days after this I will go down to Jambu-
'
dvipa;' and thereupon Mugalan returned. At this time the great kings
of eight countries with their ministers and people, not having seen Buddha
for a long time, were all thirstily looking up for him, and had collected
in clouds in this kingdom to wait for the World-honoured one.
' The heaven of Indra or Sakya, meaning 'the heaven of thirty-three classes,'
a name which has been explained both historically and mythologically. '
The
description of it,' says Eitel, p. 148, 'tallies in all respects with the Svarga of
Brahmanic mj'thology. It is situated between the four peaks of the INIeru, and
consists of thirty-two cities of devas, eight on each of the four corners of the
mountain. Indra's capital of Belle vue is in the centre. There he is enthroned,
with a thousand heads and a thousand eyes, and four arms grasping the vajra,
with his wife and 119,000 concubines. There he receives the monthly reports of
the four Maharajas, concerning the progress of good and evil in the world,' &c. &c.
- Buddha's mother, Maya and Mahamaya, the mater immaculata of the
Buddhists, died seven days after his birth. Eitel says, '
Reborn in Tushita, she
was visited there by her son and converted.' The Tushita heaven was a more
likely place to find her in than the Trayastrimsas ; but was the former a part of
the latter ? Hardy gives a long account of Buddha's visit to the Trayastrimsas
(M. B.,pp. 298-302), which he calls Tawutisa, and speaks of his mother (Matru)
in it, who had now become a deva by the changing of her sex.
^ Compare the account of the Arhat's conveyance of the artist to the Tushita
heaven in chap. v. The first expression here is more comprehensive.
^ Anuruddha was a first cousin of Sakyamuni, being the son of his uncle
Amritodana. He is often mentioned in the account we have of Buddha's last
moments. His special gift was the divyachakshus or 'heavenly eye,' the first
of the si.x abhijnas or '
supernatural talents,' the faculty of comprehending in one
DESCENT FROM THE TRAVASTRIMSAS HEA YEN. 49
Then the bhikshuni Utpala^ thought in her heart, ' To-day the kings,
with their ministers and people, will be meeting (and welcoming) all
Buddha. I am (but) a woman how shall I succeed in being the first to

;
see him ^ ? Buddha immediately, by his spirit-like power, changed

'
her into the appearance of a holy Chakravartti'^ king, and she was the
foremost of all in doing reverence to him.
As Buddha descended from his position aloft in the Trayastrirnsas
heaven, when he was coming down, there were made to appear three
flights of precious steps. Buddha was on the middle flight, the steps of
which were composed of the seven precious substances. The king of
Brahma-loka* also made a flight of silver steps appear on the right side,
(where he was seen) attending with a white chowry in his hand. Sakra,
instantaneous view, or by intuition, all beings in all worlds. '

He could see,'
says Hardy, M. B., p. 232, ' all things in 100,000 sakvalas as plainly as a mustard
seed held in the hand.'
' Eitel gives the name Utpala with the same Chinese phonetisation as in
the text, but not as the name of any bhikshuni. The Sanskrit word, however, is
explained by 'blue lotus flowers;' and Hsiian-chwang calls her the nun 'Lotus-
flower colour {^^ ^^ ^)'' — *^^ same as Hardy's Upulwan and Uppalawarna.
' Perhaps we should read here '
to see Buddha,' and then ascribe the transfor-
mation to the nun herself. It depends on the punctuation which view we adopt
and in the structure of the passage, there is nothing to indicate that the stop
should be made before or after 'Buddha.' And the one view is as reasonable, or
rather as unreasonable, as the other.
' 'A holy king who turns the wheel;' that is, the military conqueror and
monarch of the whole or part of a universe. 'The s)Tnbo!,' says Eitel (p. 142),
'
of such a king is the chakra or wheel, for when he ascends the throne, a chakra
falls from heaven, indicating by its material (gold, silver, copper, or iron) the
extent and character of his reign. The oflBce, however, of the highest Chakra-
vartti, who hurls his wheel among his enemies, is inferior to the peaceful mission
of a Buddha, who meekly turns the wheel of the Law, and conquers every universe
by his teaching.'
* This was Brahma, the first person of the Brahmanical Trimurti, adopted by
Buddhism, but placed in an inferior position, and surpassed by every Buddhist
saint who attains to bodhi.
h
Ruler of Devas\ made (a flight of) steps of purple gold on the left side,
(where he was seen) attending and holding an umbrella of the seven
precious substances. An innumerable multitude of the devas'^ followed
Buddha in his descent. When he was come down, the three flights all
disappeared in the ground, excepting seven steps, which continued to be

visible. Afterwards king Asoka, wishing to know where their ends
rested, sent men to dig and see. They went down to the yellow
springs^ without reaching the bottom of the steps, and from this the king
received an increase to his reverence and faith, and built a vihara over
the steps, with a standing image, sixteen cubits in height, right over the
middle flight. Behind the vihara he erected a stone pillar, about fifty
cubits high ^, with a lion on the top of it ^ Let into the pillar, on each
of its four sides", there is an image of Buddha, inside and ouf shining
and transparent, and pure as it were of lapis lazuli. Some teachers
of another doctrine * once disputed with the Sramanas about (the right
to) this as a place of residence, and the latter were having the worst of
^ See note 2, p. 30.

° See note 3, p. 19.
' A common name for the earth below, where, on digging, water is found.
* The height is given as thirty chow, the chow being the distance from the
elbow to the finger-tip, which is variously estimated.
" A note of Mr. Beal says on this :
— General
' Cunningham, who visited the
spot (1862), foimd a pillar, evidently of the age of Aiôka, with a well-carved
elephant on the top, which, however, was minus trunk and tail. He supposes this
to be the pillar seen by Fa-hien, who mistook the top of it for a lion. It is
possible such a mistake may have been made, as in the account of one of the
pillars at Sravasti, Fa-hien says an ox formed the capital, whilst Hsiian-chwang
calls it an elephant (p. 19, Arch. Survey).'
' That is, in niches on the sides. The pillar or column must have been
square.
' Equivalent to '
all through.'
;
^ Has always been translated '
heretical teachers ' but I eschew the terms
heresy and heretical. The parties would not be Buddhists of any creed or school,
but Brahmans or of some other false doctrine, as Fa-hien deemed it. The Chinese
—
term means 'outside' or 'foreign;' in Pali, an5a-titthiya,=' those belonging to
another school.'
PLACES WHERE TOPES WERE BUILT. 51
the argument, when they took an oath on both sides on the condition that,
if the place did indeed belong to the Sramanas, there should be some
marvellous attestation of it. When these words had been spoken, the lion
on the top gave a great roar, thus giving the pxoof; on which their
opponents were frightened, bowed to the decision, and withdrew.
Through Buddha having for three months partaken of the food of
heaven, his body emitted a heavenly fragrance, unlike that of an ordinary
man. He went immediately and bathed and afterwards, at the spot ;
where he did so, a bathing-house was built, which is still existing. At

the place where the bhikshuni Utpala was the first to do reverence to
Buddha, a tope has now been built.
At the places where Buddha, when he was in the world, cut his hair
and nails ^, topes are erected and where the three Buddhas ^ that
;
preceded Sakyamuni Buddha and he himself sat where they walked ^, ;
and where images of their persons were made. At all these places
topes were made, and are still existing. At the place where Sakra,
Ruler of the Devas, and the king of the Brahma-loka followed Buddha
down (from the Trayastrirnsas heaven) they have also raised a tope.
At this place the monks and nuns may be a thousand, who all receive
* See above, p. 39.

^ These three predecessors of Sakyamuni were the three Buddhas of the
present or Maha-bhadra Kalpa, of which he was the fourth, and IMaitreya is to
be the fifth and last. They were:

Krakuchanda (Pali, Kakusanda), 'he
(i)
who readOy solves all doubts
;
a scion of the Kasyapa family.
' Human life
reached in his time 40,000 years, and so many persons were converted by him.
(2) Kanakamuni (Pali, Konagamana), 'body radiant with the colour of pure
gold of the same family.
; ' Human life reached in his time 30,000 years, and so
many persons were converted by him. (3) Kasyapa (Pali, Kassapa), swallower '
of light.' Human life reached in his time 20,000 years, and so many persons
were converted by him. See Eitel, under the several names ; Hardy's M. B.,
pp. 95-97; and Davids' 'Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 51.

' That is, walked in meditation. Such places are called Chahkramana (Pali,
Chankama) promenades or corridors connected with a monastery, made
;
sometimes with costly stones, for the purpose of peripatetic meditation. The
' sitting ' would be not because of weariness or for rest, but for meditation. E. H.,
p. 144.
h2
their food common store, and pursue their studies, some of the
from the
mahayana and some of the hinayana. Where they live, there is a
white-eared dragon, which acts the part ofdanapati^ to the community
of these monks, causing abundant harvests in the country, and the en-
riching rains to come in season, without the occurrence of any calamities,
so that the monks enjoy their repose and ease. In gratitude for its
kindness, they have made for it a dragon-house, with a carpet for it
to sit on, and appointed for it a diet of blessing, which they present for
its nourishment. Every day they set apart three of their number to go
to its house, and eat there. Whenever the summer retreat is ended, the
dragon straightway changes its form, and appears as a small snake ^,
with white spots at the side of its ears. As soon as the monks recognise
it, they fill a copper vessel with cream, into which they put the creature,
and then carry it round from the one who has the highest seat (at their
tables) to him who has the lowest, when it appears as if saluting them.
When it has been taken round, immediately it disappears and every ;
year it thus comes forth once. The country is very productive, and the
people are prosperous, and happy beyond comparison. When people of
other countries come to it, they are exceedingly attentive to them all,
and supply them with what they need.
Fifty yojanas north-west from the monastery there is another, called
'The Great Heap^' Great Heap was the name of a wicked demon,
who was converted by Buddha, and men subsequently at this place
reared a vihara. When it was being made over to an Arhat by pouring
water on his hands *, some drops fell on the ground. They are still on

* The character in my Corean copy is i|j|, which must be a mistake for the
^1^ of the Chinese editions. Otherwise, the meaning would be '
a small medusa.'
' The reading here seems to me a great improvement on that of the Chinese
editions, which means ' Fire Limit.' Buddha, it is said, 2fc converted this demon,
which Chinese character Beal rendered at first by '
in one of his incarnations ;' and
in his revised version he has '
himself.' The difference between Fa-hien's usage of
^gj and ^^ throughout his narrative is quite marked. /I^ always refers to the
doings of Sakyamuni ; ^S^, '

formerly,' is often used of him and others in the
sense of '
in a former age or birth.'
* See Hardy, M. B., p. 194: —-'As a token of the giving over of the garden,
LEGENDS. KANYAKUBJA. ^^
the spot, and however they may be brushed away and removed, they
continue to be visible, and cannot be made to disappear.
At this place there is also a tope to Buddha, where a good spirit
constantly keeps (all about it)swept and watered, without any labour of
man being required. A king of corrupt views once said, Since you are '
able to do this, I will lead a multitude of troops and reside there till the
dirt and filth has increased and accumulated, and (see) whether you can
cleanse it away or not.' The spirit thereupon raised a great wind, which
blew (the filth away), and made the place pure.
At this place there are a hundred small topes, at which a man may keep
counting a whole day without being able to know (their exact number).
If he be firmly bent on knowing it, he will place a man by the side
of each tope. When this is done, proceeding to count the number of
the men, whether they be many or few, he will not get to know (the
number)^.
There is a monastery, containing perhaps 600 or 700 monks, in which
there is a place where a Pratyeka Buddha- used to take his food.
The nirvana ground (where he was burned
^ after death) is as large as a
carriage wheel and while grass grows all around, on this spot there
;
is none. The ground also where he dried his clothes produces no grass,
but the impression of them, where they lay on it, continues to the
present day.
CHAPTER XVni.
KANYAKUBJA, OR CANOUGE. BUDDHA'S PREACHING.
Fa-HIEN Stayed at the Dragon vihara till after the summer retreat *,
and then, travelling to the south-east for seven yojanas, he arrived at the
the king poured water upon the hands of Buddha ; and from this time it became
one of the principal residences of the sage.'
^ This would seem to be absurd ; but the writer evidently intended to convey
the idea that there was something mysterious about the number of the topes.
''
See note 2, p. 40.
' This seems to be the meaning. The bodies of the monks are all burned.
Hardy's E. M., pp. 322-324.
* We are now, probably, in
405.
city of Kanyakubja^, lying along the Ganges-. There are two monas-
teries in it, the inmates of which are students of the hinayana. At a
distance from the city of six or seven le, on the west, on the northern bank
of the Ganges, is a place where Buddha preached the Law to his disciples.
It has been handed down that his subjects of discourse were such as The '
bitterness and vanity (of life) as impermanent and uncertain,' and that
'
The body is as a bubble or foam on the water.' At this spot a tope
was erected, and still exists.
Having crossed the Ganges, and gone south for three yojanas, (the
travellers) arrived at a village named A-le^ containing places where
Buddha preached the Law, where he sat, and where he walked, at all
of which topes have been built.
CHAPTER XIX.
SHA-CHE. LEGEND OF BUDDHA's DANTA-KAsHTHA.
Going on from this to the south-east for three yojanas, they came to
the great kingdom of Sha-che*. As you go out of the city of Sha-che by
the southern gate, on the east of the road (is the place) where Buddha,
after he had chewed his willow branch ^, stuck it in the ground, when it
'
Canouge, the latitude and longitude of which have been given in a previous
;
note. The Sanskrit name means the city of humpbacked maidens
'
with '
reference to the legend of the hundred daughters of king Brahma-datta, who

were made deformed by the curse of the rishi Rlaha-vriksha, whose overtures they
had refused. E. H., p. 51.
^ Ganga, explained by '
Blessed water,' and '
Come from heaven to earth.'
' This village (the Chinese editions read '
forest ') has hardly been clearly
identified.
* Sha-che should probably be Sha-khe, making Cunningham's identifica-
tion of the name with the present Saket more likely.
still The change of
jjj^ into jjjf^
is slight; and, indeed, the Khang-hsf dictionary thinks the two
characters should be but one and the same.
^ This was, no doubt, what was called the danta-kashtha, or 'dental wood,'
mostly a bit of the ficus Indicus or banyan tree, which the monk chews every
morning to cleanse his teeth, and for the purpose of health generally. The
B UDDHA 'S DA NTA -KA SHTHA . SRA VA STL 55
forthwith grew up seven cubits, (at which height it remained) neither

increasing nor diminishing. The Brahmans with their contrary doctrines ^
became angry and jealous. Sometimes they cut the tree down, some-
times they plucked it up, and cast it to a distance, but it grew again on the
same spot as at first. Here also is the place where the four Buddhas
walked and sat, and at which a tope was built that is still existing.
CHAPTER XX.
KOSALA AND SRAVASXi. THE JETAVANA VIHARA AXD OTHER
MEMORIALS AND LEGENDS OF BUDDHA. SYMPATHY OF THE
MONKS WITH THE PILGRIMS.
Going on from yojanas, (the travellers)
this to the south, for eight
came to the city of Sravasti kingdom of Kosala ^, in which the
- in the
inhabitants were few and far between, amounting in all (only) to a few more
than two hundred families the city where king Prasenajit * ruled, and
;
the place of the old vihara of Maha-prajapati^; of the well and walls of
Chinese, not having the banyan, have used, or at least Fa-hien used, Yang
\^, the general name for the willow) instead of it.
^ Are two classes of opponents, or only one, intended here, so that we should
read 'all the unbelievers and Brahmans,' or 'heretics and Brahmans?' I think
the Brahmans were also the unbelievers and heretics,' having

'
'
'
^h ^^, views
and ways outside of, and opposed to, Buddha's.
^ In Singhalese, Sewet ; here evidently the capital of Kosala. It is placed
by Cunningham (Archaeological Siu-vey) on the south bank of the Rapti,
about fifty-eight Ayodya or Oude. There are still the ruins of a
miles north of
great town, the name being Sahet Mahat. It was in this town, or in its neighbour-
hood, that Sakyamuni spent many j'ears of his life after he became Buddha.
^ There were two Indian kingdoms of this name, a southern and northern.
This was the northern, a part of the present Oudli.
' In Singhalese, Pase-nadi, meaning leader of the victorious army.'
'
He was
one of the earliest converts and chief patrons of Sakyamuni. Eitel calls him
(p. 95) one of the originators of Buddliist idolatry, because of the statue which is
mentioned in this chapter. See Hardy's M. B., pp. 283, 284, et al.
^ Explained by '
Path of Love,' and '
Lord of Life.' Prajapati was aunt and
(the house of) the (Vaisya) head Sudatta^; and where the Angulimalya*
became an Arhat, and body was
(afterwards) burned on his attaining
his
to pari-nirvana. At all these places topes were subsequently erected,
which are still existing in the city. The Brahmans, with their contrary
doctrine, became full of hatred and envy in their hearts, and wished
to destroy them, but there came from the heavens such a storm of
crashing thunder and flashing lightning that they were not able in the
end to effect their purpose.
As you go out from the city by the south gate, and 1,200 paces
from it, the (Vaisya) head Sudatta built a vihara, facing the south;
and when the door was open, on each side of it there was a stone
pillar, with the figure of a wheel on the top of that on the left, and
the figure of an ox on the top of that on the right. On the left and
right of the building the ponds of water clear and pure, the thickets
of trees always luxuriant, and the numerous flowers of various hues,
constituted a lovely scene, the whole forming what is called the Jetavana
vihara^.
When Buddha went up to the Trayastrirnsas heaven *, and preached
the Law for the benefit of his mother*, (after he had been absent for)
nurse of Sakyamuni, the first woman admitted to the monkhood, and the first
superior of the first Buddhistic convent. She is yet tobecome a Buddha.

'
Sudatta, meaning '
almsgiver,' was the original name of Anatha-pindika (or
Pindada), a wealthy householder, or Vaisya head, of Sravasti, famous for his
liberality (Hardy, Anepidu). Of his old house, only the well and walls remained
at the time of Fa-hien's visit to Sravasti.
^ The Ahgulimalya were a sect or set of Sivaitic fanatics, who made assassi-
nation a religious act. The one of them here mentioned had joined them by
the force of circumstances. Being converted by Buddha, he became a monk but ;
when it is said in the te.xt that he '

got the Tao,' or doctrine, I think that expres-
sion implies more than his conversion, and is equivalent to his becoming an Arhat.
His name in Pali is Ahgulimala. That he did become an Arhat is clear from his
autobiographical poem in the '
Songs of the Theras.'
^ Eitel 37) says:
(p.
—
'A noted vihara in the suburbs of Sravasti, erected
in a park which Anatha-pindika bought of prince Jeta, the son of Prasenajit.
Sakyamuni made this place his favourite residence for many years. IVIost of the
Sfitras (authentic and supposititious) date from this spot.'
* See chapter xvii.
IMAGE OF BUDDHA. 57
ninety days, Prasenajit, longing to see him, caused an image of him

to be carved in Gosirsha Chandana wood S and put in the place
where he usually sat. When Buddha on his return entered the vihara,
this image immediately left its place, and came forth to meet him.
Buddha said to it, Return to your seat. After I have attained to
'
pari-nirvana, you will serve as a pattern to the four classes of my

disciples -,' and on this the image returned to its seat. This was the
very first of all the images (of Buddha), and that which men subse-
quently copied. Buddha then removed, and dwelt in a small vihara
on the south side (of the other), a different place from that containing
the image, and twenty pac'es distant from it.
The Jetavana vihara was originally of seven storeys. The kings and
people of the countries around vied with one another in their offerings,
hanging up about it silken streamers and canopies, scattering flowers,
burning incense, and lighting lamps, so as to make the night as bright as
the day. This they did day after day without ceasing. (It happened
that) a rat, carrying in its mouth the wick of a lamp, set one of the
streamers or canopies on fire, which caught the vihara, and the seven
storeys w-ere all consumed. The kings, with their officers and people, were
all very sad and distressed, supposing that the sandal-wood image had
been burned but lo after four or five days, when the door of a small
; !
vihara on the east was opened, there was immediately seen the original
image. They were all greatly rejoiced, and co-operated in restoring the
vihara. When they had succeeded in completing two storeys, they
removed the image back to its former place.
When Fa-hien and Tao-ching first arrived at the Jetavana monas-
tery, and thought how the World-honoured one had formerly resided
' See chapter xiii.
^ Arya, meaning '

honourable,' '
venerable,' is a title given only to those
who have mastered the four spiritual truths; — (i) that 'misery' is a necessary
condition of all sentient existence; this is duhkha: (2) that the 'accumulation'
of misery is caused by the passions; this is samudaya: (3) that the 'extinc-
tion' of passion is possible; this is nirodha: and (4) diat the 'path' leads to
the extinction of passion; which is marga. According to their attainment of
Aryas, or followers of Buddha, are distinguished into four

these truths, the classes,
— Srotapannas, Sakridagamins, Anagamins, and Arhats. E. H., p. 14.

5« THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
there for twenty-five years, painful reflections arose in their minds.
Bom a border-land, along with their like-minded friends, they had
in
travelled through so many kingdoms some of those friends had returned ;
(to their ownand some had (died), proving the impermanence and
land),
uncertainty of life; and to-day they saw the place where Buddha had
lived now unoccupied by him. They were melancholy through their pain
of heart, and the crowd of monks came out, and asked them from what
kingdom they were come. 'We are come,' they replied, 'from the land
of Han.' Strange,' said the monks with a sigh, that men of a border
' '
country should be able to come here in search of our Law!' Then they
said to one another, '
During all the time that we, preceptors and
monks ^, have succeeded to one another, we have never seen men of Han,
followers of our system, arrive here.'
Four le to the north-west of the vihara there is a grove called 'The
Getting of Eyes.' Formerly there were five hundred blind men, who
lived here in order that they might be near the vihara^. Buddha
' This is the first time that Fa-hien employs the name Ho-shang
(5^ fp^).
^^'hich is now popularly used in China for all Buddhist monks
without distinction of rank or office. It is the representative of the Sanskrit
term Upadhyaya, 'explained,' says Eitel (p. 155), by 'a self-taught teacher,'
or by 'he who knows what is sinful and what is not sinful,' with the note,
' In Indiathe vernacular of this term is
!^ jifj^ (Pmunshee [.? Bonze]); in Kustana
and Kashgar they sa}- '^^ jji£ (hwa-shay) ; and from the latter term are derived
the Chinese synon}'ms,
^^ (ho-shay) and
term was originally a designation for those who teach only a part of the Vedas,
^ "jp^ (ho-shang).' The Indian
the Vedahgas. Adopted by Buddhists of Central Asia, it was made to signify the
priests of the older ritual, in disdnction from the Lamas. In China it has been
used first as a synonym for
^ |j]j, monks engaged in popular teaching (teachers
of the Law), in distinction from

philosophers (meditationists) ;
^
then it
Ijjj,
was used
disciplinists, and jjj^
to designate the abbots of
^jjj, contemplative
monas-
teries. But it is now popularly applied to all Buddhist monks. In the text there
seems to be implied some distinction between the 'teachers' and the 'ho-shang;'
—probably, the Pali A,âriya and Upa^^g'/iaya ; see Sacred Books of the East,
Vinaya Texts, pp. 178, 179.
vol. xiii,
* It might be added, as depending on it,' '
in order to bring out the full
meaning of the in the text.^ If I recollect aright, the help of the police
THE JETAVANA VIHARA. 59
preached his Law to them, and they all got back their eyesight. Full
of joy, they stuck their staves in the earth, and with their heads and
faces on the ground, did reverence. The staves immediately began to
grow, and they grew to be great. People made much of them, and no one
dared to cut them down, so that they came to form a grove. It was in
this way that name, and most of the Jetavana monks, after
it got its
they had taken their midday meal, went to the grove, and sat there in
meditation.
Six or seven le north-east from the Jetavana, mother Vaisakha ^ built
another vihara, to which she invited Buddha and his monks, and which
is still existing.
To each of the great residences for the monks at the Jetavana
vihara there were two gates, one facing the east and the other facing the
north. The park (containing the whole) was the space of ground which
the (Vaisya) head Sudatta purchased by covering it with gold coins.
The vihara was exactly in the centre. Here Buddha lived for a longer
time than at any other place, preaching his Law and converting men.
At the places where he walked and sat they also (subsequently) reared
topes, each having its particular name ; and here was the place where
Sundari- murdered a person and then falsely charged Buddha (with the
crime). Outside the east gate of the Jetavana, at a distance of seventy
paces to the north, on the west of the road, Buddha held a discussion
had to be called in at Hongkong in its early years, to keep the approaches to

the Cathedral free from the number of beggars, who squatted down there during
service, hoping that the hearers would come out with softened hearts, and disposed
to be charitable. I found the popular tutelary temples in Peking and other places,
and the path up Mount T'ai in Shan-lung similarly frequented.
' The wife of Anatha-pindika in note i, p. 56, and who became 'mother-
superior' of many nunneries. See her history in W. B., pp. 220-227. I ^r"
surprised it does not end with the statement that she is become a Buddha.
to
^ See E. H., p. 136. Hsiian-chwang does not give the name of this murderer;
see in Julien's 'Vie et Voyages de Hiouen-thsang,' p. 125, —
'a heretical Brahman
killed a woman and calumniated Buddha.' See also the fuller account in Beal's
'
Records of Western Countries,' pp. 7, 8, where the murder is committed by
several Brahmacharins. In this passage Beal makes Sundari to be the name
of the murdered person (a harlot). But the text cannot be so construed.
i 2
6o THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
with the (advocates of the) ninety-six schemes of erroneous doctrine,
when the king and his great officers, the householders, and people were
all assembled in crowds to hear it. Then a woman belonging to one of the
erroneous systems, by name Chanchamana^, prompted by the envious
hatred in her heart, and having put on (extra) clothes in front of her
person, so as to give her the appearance of being with child, falsely accused
Buddha before all the assembly of having acted unlawfully (towards her).
On this, Sakra, Ruler of Devas, changed himself and some devas into white
mice, which bit through the strings about her waist ;and when this was
done, the (extra) clothes which she wore dropt down on the ground.
The earth at the same time was rent, and she went (down) alive into
hell ^. (This) also is the place where Devadatta^, trying with empoisoned
claws to injure Buddha, went down alive into hell. Men subsequently
setup marks to distinguish where both these events took place.
Further, at the place where the discussion took place, they reared a
vihara rather more than sixty cubits high, having in it an image of
Buddha in a sitting posture. On the east of the road there was a deva-
laya* of (one of ) the contrary systems, called 'The Shadow Covered,'
' Eitel (p. 144) calls her Chaucha; in Singhalese, Chinchi. See the story
about her, M. B., pp. 275-277.
^ 'Earth's prison,' or 'one of Earth's prisons.' It was the Avichi naraka
to which she went, the last of the eight hot prisons, where the culprits die, and
are born again in uninterrupted succession (such being the meaning of Avichi),
though not without hope of final redemption. E. H., p. 21.
^ Devadatta was brother of Ananda, and a near relative therefore of
Sakyamuni. He was the deadly enemy, however, of the latter. He had
become so in an earlier state of existence, and the hatred continued in every
successive birth, through which they reappeared in the world. See the accounts
of him, and of his various devices against Buddha, and his own destruction at
the last, in M. B., pp. 315-321, 326-330; and still better, in the Sacred Books of
the East, vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, pp. 233-265. For the particular attempt referred
to in the text, see' The Life of the Buddha,' p. 107. When he was engulphed,
and the flames were around him, he cried out Buddha to save him, and we
to
are told that he is expected yet to appear as a Buddha under the name of Deva-
raja, in a universe called Deva-soppana. E. H., p. 39.
* ' A devalaya \J^ ^p or -^ jjl^))
'^ place in which a deva is worshipped,
THE SHADOW-COVERED DEVALAYA. 6i
right opposite the vihara on the place of discussion, with (only) the road
between them, and also rather more than sixty cubits high. The reason
why it was called The Shadow Covered was this
'
When the sun ' :
—
was in the west, the shadow of the vihara of the World-honoured one fell
on the devalaya of a contrary system; but when the sun was in the east,
the shadow of that devalaya was diverted to the north, and never fell
on the vihara of Buddha. The mal-believers regularly employed men
to watch their devalaya, to sweep and water (all about it), to bum
incense, light the lamps, and present offerings but in the morning the ;
lamps were found to have been suddenly removed, and in the vihara
of Buddha. The Brahmans were indignant, and said, Those Sramanas '
take our lamps and use them for their own service of Buddha, but we
will not stop our service for you ^
!
' On
Brahmans them- that night the
selves kept watch, when they saw the deva which they ser\'ed spirits
take the lamps and go three times round the vihara of Buddha and present
offerings. After this ministration to Buddha they suddenly disappeared.
The Brahmans thereupon knowing how great was the spiritual power of
Buddha, forthwith left their families, and became monks-. It has
been handed down, that, near the time when these things occurred,
around the Jetavana vihara there were ninety-eight monasteries, in all
—a general name for all Brahmanical temples ' (Eitel, p. 30). We read in the
Khang-hsi dictionary under ^, when Kaiyapa Matahga came to
that the
capital in the time of the emperor Ming of the second Han dynasty, from the
Western Regions, with his Classics or Sutras, he was lodged in the Court of
State-Ceremonial, and that afterwards there was built for him '
The Court
of the White-horse '
(Q ,P& ^^)' ^"*^ '"^ consequence the name of Sze i^r)
came to be given to all Buddhistic temples. Fa-hien, however, applies this
term only to Brahmanical temples.
'
Their speech was somewhat unconnected, but natural enough in the circum-
stances. Compare the whole account with the narrative in i Samuel v. about the
Ark and Dagon, that twice-battered god of Palestine.'
'
^ '
Entered the doctrine or path.' Three stages in the Buddhistic life are
indicated by Fa-hien :
— entering
' it,' as here, by becoming monks (y^ »^) ;
'getting it,' by becoming Arhats

(^ jM!)
' ^^^ 'completing it,' by becoming
Buddha (^ if).
6a THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
of which there were monks residing, excepting only in one place which
was vacant. In this Middle Kingdom^ there are ninety-six^ sorts of
views, erroneous and different from our system, all of which recognise
this world and the future world '^
(and the connexion between them).
Each has its multitude of followers, and they all beg their food only :
they do not carry the alms-bowl. They also, moreover, seek (to acquire)
the blessing (of good deeds) on unfrequented ways, setting up on the
road-side houses of charity, where rooms, couches, beds, and food and
drink are supplied to travellers, and also to monks, coming and going
as guests, the only difference being in the time (for which those parties
remain).
There are also companies of the followers of Devadatta still existing.
They regularly make offerings to the three previous Buddhas, but not
to Sakyamuni Buddha ^.
Four le south-east from the city of Sravasti, a tope has been
*
It is not quite clear whether the author had in mind here Central India as
a whole, which I think he had, or only Kosala, the part of it where he then
was. In the older teaching, there were only thirty-two sects, but there may have
been three subdivisions of each. See Rhys Davids' 'Buddhism,' pp. 98, 99.
" This mention of '
the future world is an important difference between
'
the Corean and Chinese texts. The want of it in the latter has been a
stumbling-block in the way of all previous translators. R^musat says in a note
that '
the heretics limited themselves to speak of the duties of man in his actual
life without connecting it by the notion of the metempsychosis with the anterior
periods of existence through which he had passed.'
But this is just the opposite
of what meaning was, according to our Corean text. The notion
Fa-hien's
of the metempsychosis
'
was just that in which all the ninety-six erroneous
'
systems agreed among themselves and with Buddhism. If he had wished to
say what the French sinologue thinks he does say, moreover, he would probably
have written -^ ^^ j^^ B!. Let
which Buddhism holds between the past world (including the present) and the
me add, however, that the connexion
future is not that of a metempsychosis, or transmigration of souls, for it does not

appear to admit any separate existence of the soul. Adhering to its own
phraseology of the wheel,' ' I would call its doctrine that of '
The Transrotation
of Births.' See Rhys Davids' third Hibbert Lecture.
' See p. 60, note 3 ; and p. 51, note 2.
THE PREDECESSORS OF SAKFAMUNI. 63
erected at the place where the World-honoured one encountered king

Virildhaha^.when he wished to attack the kingdom of Shay-e\ and took
his stand before him at the side of the road -.
CHAPTER XXI.
THE THREE PREDECESSORS OF SAKYAMUNI IX THE
BUDDHASHIP.
Fifty le to the west of the city bring (the traveller) to a town
named Too-wei ^, the birthplace of Kasyapa Buddha ^. At the place
where he and his father met*, and at that where he attained to pari-
nirvana, topes were erected. Over the entire relic of the whole body
of him, the Kasyapa Tathagata ^, a great tope was also erected.
' Or, more according to the phonetisation of the text, Vaidurya. He was
king of Kosala, the son and successor of Prasenajit, and the destroyer of
Kapilavastu, the city of the Sakya family. His hostility to the Sakyas is
sufiiciently established, and it may be considered as certain that the name Shay-e,
which, according to Julien's '
Methode,' p. 89, may be read Chia-e, is the same
as Kia-e (^0 9^)' "^"^ ^^ ^^^ phonetisations of Kapilavastu, as given by Eitel.
^ This would be the interview
in the Life of the Buddha in Triibner's
'
'
Oriental Series, p. 116, when Virudhaha on his march found Buddha under
an old sakotato tree. It afforded him no shade; but he told the king that
the thought of the danger of his relatives and kindred made it shady.'
'
The
king was moved to sympathy for the time, and went back to Sravasti but the ;
destruction of Kapilavastu was only postponed for a short space, and Buddha
himself acknowledged it to be inevitable in the connexion of cause and effect.
' Identified, as Beal says, by Cunningham with Tadwa, a village nine miles to
the west of Sahara-mahat. The birthplace of Kasyapa Buddha is generally
thought to have been Benares. According to a calculation of R^musat, from his
birth to A.D. 1832 there were 1,992,859 years!
* It seems to be necessary to have a meeting between every Buddha and his
father. One at least is ascribed to Sakyamuni and his father (real or supposed)
Suddhodana.
^ This is the highest epithet given to every supreme Buddha ; in Chinese
5ffJ 5k. meaning, as Eitel, p. 147, says, '
Sic profectus sum.' It is equivalent
to '
Rightful Buddha, the true successor in the Supreme Buddha Line.' Hardy
Going on south-east from the city of Sravasti for twelve yojanas,
(the travellers)came to a town named Na-pei-kea ^, the birthplace of
Krakuchanda Buddha^. At the place where he and his father met,
and at that where he attained to pari-nirvana, topes were erected.
Going north from here less than a yojana, they came to a town which
had been the birthplace of Kanakamuni Buddha ". At the place where he
and his father met, and where he attained to pari-nirvana, topes were
erected.
CHAPTER XXII.
KAPILAVASTU. ITS DESOLATION. LEGENDS OF BUDDHA'S BIRTH,
AND OTHER INCIDENTS IN CONNEXION WITH IT.
Less than a yojana to the east from this brought them to the city of
Kapilavastu ^ ; but in it there was neither king nor people. All was
mound and desolation. Of inhabitants there were only some monks
and a score or two of families of the common people. At the spot
where stood the old palace of king Suddhodana * there have been made
concludes his account of the Kasyapa Buddha (M. B., p. 97) with the following
sentence :
— After
' his body was burnt, the bones still remained in their usual
position, presenting the appearance of a perfect skeleton
and the whole of the ;
inhabitants of Jambudvipa, assembling together, erected a dagoba over his relics

!'
one yojana in height
^ Na-pei-kea or Nabhiga is not mentioned elsewhere. Eitel says this Buddha
was born
as IMekhala.
at the city of
It may be
Gan-ho
possible,
(^ ^ ^), and Hardy gives
by means of Sanskrit, to
his birthplace
reconcile these
statements.
- See note 2, p. 51.
' Kapilavastu, '
the city of beautiful virtue,' was the birthplace of âkyamuni,
but was destroyed, as intimated in the notes on last chapter, during his life-
time. It was situated a short distance north-west of the present Goruckpoor,

lat. 26° 46' N., Ion. 83° 19' E. Davids says (Manual, p. 25), 'It was on the
banks of the river Rohini, the modern Kohana, about 100 miles north-west of
the city of Benares.'
' The father, or supposed father, of âkyamuni. He is here called '
the king
white and pure '
(^ J^ ^). A more common appellation is 'the king of pure

y /
I. DREAM OF BUDDHA'S MOTHER OF HIS INCARNATION.

KAPILAVASTU. 6':^
images of the prince (his eldest son) and his mother*; and at the places
where that son appeared mounted on a white elephant when he entered
his mother's womb
-, and where he turned his carriage round on seeing the
sick man
he had gone out of the city by the eastern gate ^, topes
after
have been erected. The places (were also pointed out) * where (the rishi)
A-e ^ inspected the marks ^ (of Buddhaship on the body) of the heir-
apparent (when an infant) where, when he was in company with Nanda ;
and others, on the elephant being struck down and drawn on one side,
he tossed it away ' where he shot an arrow to the south-east, and it
;
rice i^^ ^^ i)j' ^^^ ^^ character ^^, or 'rice,' must be a mistake for^*,
'
Brahman,' and the appellation='Pure Brahman king.'
* The '
eldest son ' orwas Sakyamuni, and his mother had no other son.
'
prince'
For '
his mother,' see note 2, She was a daughter of Aiijana or Anusakya,
page 48.
king of the neighbouring country of Koli, and Yasodhara, an aunt of Suddhodana.
There appear to have been various intermarriages between the royal houses of
Kapila and Koli.
^ In 'The Life of the Buddha,' p. 15, we read that 'Buddha was now in the
Tushita heaven, and knowing that his time was come (the time for his last rebirth
in the course of which he would become Buddha), he made the necessary examina-
tions ; and having decided that Maha-maya was the right mother, in the midnight
watch he entered her womb under the appearance of an elephant.' See M. B.,
pp. 140-143, and, still better, Rhys Davids' 'Birth Stories,' pp. 58-63.
' In Hardy's M. B., pp. 154, 155, we read, '
As the prince (Siddhartha, the first
name given to Sakyamuni ; see Eitel, under Sarvarthasiddha) was one day pass-
ing along, he saw a deva under the appearance of a leper, full of sores, with a body
like a water-vessel, and legs like the pestle for pounding rice ; and when he learned
from was that he saw, he became agitated, and returned at
his charioteer what it
once to the palace.' See also Rhys Davids' 'Buddhism,' p. 29.

* This is an addition of my own, instead of There are also topes erected '
at the following spots ' of former translators. Fa-hien does not say there were
memorial topes at all these places.
'•
Asita; see Eitel, p. 15. He is called in Pah Kala Devala, and had been a
minister of Suddhodana's father.
° See note 2, page 39.
' In 'The Life of the Buddha' we read that the Lichchhavis of Vaisalihad sent to
the young prince a very fine elephant ; but when it was near Kapilavastu, Devadatta,
k
went a distance of thirty le, then entering the ground and making a
spring to which men subsequently fashioned into a well

come forth,
from which travellers might drink'; where, after he had attained to
Wisdom ^, Buddha returned and saw the king, his father ^ where five ;
hundred Sakyas quitted their families and did reverence to Upali * while
the earth shook and moved in six different ways where Buddha preached ;
his Law to the devas, and the four deva kings and others kept the four
doors (of the hall), so that (even) the king, his father, could not enter ^
where Buddha under a nyagrodha tree, which is still standing^, with

sat
his face to the east, and (his aunt) Maha-prajapati presented him with a
out of envy, killed it with a blow of his fist. Nanda (not Ananda, but a half-brother
of Siddhartha), coining that way, saw the carcase lying on the road, and pulled it on
one side ; but the Bodhisattva, seeing it there, took it by the tail, and tossed it over
seven fences and ditches, when the force of its fall made a great ditch. I suspect
that the characters in the column have been disarranged, and that we should
read
^^^
at this time only ten years old.
^, ^ ^,-^ ;^. Buddha, that is Siddhartha, was
' The young Sakyas were shooting when the prince thus surpassed them all.
He was then seventeen.

° See note 2, page 61.
' This was not the night when he finally fled from Kapilavastu, and as he
was leaving the palace, perceived his sleeping father, and said, '
Father, though I
love thee, yet a fear possesses me, and I may not stay ;'
—The Life of the Buddha,
p. 25. Most probably it was that related in M. B., pp. 199-204. See 'Buddhist
Birth Stories,' pp. 120-127.
* They did this, I suppose, to show their humility, for Upali was only a
Sfidra by birth, and had been a barber ; so from the first did Buddhism assert its
superiority to the conditions of rank and caste. Upali was distinguished by his
knowledge of the rules of discipline, and praised on that account by Buddha. He
was one of the three leaders of the first synod, and the principal compiler of the
original Vinaya books.
^ I have not met with the particulars of this preaching.
° Meaning, as explained in Chinese, a tree without knots ' ; ' the ficus Indica.
See Rhys Davids' note. Manual, p. 39, where he says that a branch of one of these
trees was taken from Buddha Gaya to Anuradhapura in Ceylon in the middle
of the third century B.C., and is still growing there, the oldest historical tree
in the world.
III. BUDDHA TOSSING THE ELEPHANT OVER THE WALL,
II. BUDDHA JUST BORN, WITH THE NAGAS SUPPLYING WATER TO WASH HIM. Ch. 22.
BIRTH OF BUDDHA. 67
Sarighali '
and (where) king Vaidurya slew the seed of Sakya, and they
;
all in dying became Srotapannas -. tope was erected at this last A

place, which is still existing.
Several le north-east from the city was the king's field, where the heir-
apparent sat under a tree, and looked at the ploughers ^.
Fifty le east from the city was a garden, named Lumbini*, where
the queen entered the pond and bathed. Having come forth from the
pond on the northern bank, after (walking) twenty paces, she lifted up
her hand, laid hold of a branch of a tree, and, with her face to the east,
gave birth to the heir-apparent °. When he fell to the ground, he (imme-
diately) walked seven paces. Two dragon-kings (appeared) and washed
his body. At the place where they did so, there was immediately formed
a well, and from it, as well as from the above pond, where (the queen)
bathed^, the monks (even) now constantly take the water, and
drink it.
' See note i, page 39. I have not met with the account of this presenta-
tion. See the long account of Prajapati in I\I. B., pp. 306-315.
' See note 2, page 57. The brotapannas are the first class of saints,
who are not to be reborn in a lower sphere, but attain to nirvana after ha\ing
been reborn seven times consecutively as men or devas. The Chinese editions
state there were '
1000 of the Sakya
'
seed. The general account is that they were
500, all maidens, who refused to take their place in king \'aidurya's harem, and
were in consequence taken to a pond, and had their hands and feet cut off.
There Buddha came to them, had their wounds dressed, and preached to them
the Law. They died in the faith, and were reborn in the region of the four Great
Kings. Thence they came back and visited Buddha at Jetavana in the night, and
there they obtained the reward of Srotapanna. 'The Life of the Buddha,' p. 121.
' See the account of this in M. B., p. 150. The account of it reminds me of
the ploughing by the sovereign, which has been an institution in China from the
earliest times. But there we have no magic and no extravagance.
;
* '
The place of Liberadon ' see note 2, page 38.
' See the accounts of this event in j\L B., pp. 145, 146 ;
'
The Life of the
Buddha,' pp. 15, 16; and 'Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 66.
' There is difficulty in construing the text of this last statement. Mr. Beal
had, no doubt inadvertently, omitted it in his first translation. In his revised
version he gives for it, I cannot say happily, '
As well as at the pool, the water of
which came down from above for washing (the child).'
k 2
There are four places of regular and fixed occurrence (in the history
of) allBuddhas —
first, the place where they attained to perfect Wisdom
:
(and became Buddha) second, the place where they turned the wheel of
;
the Law ^ third, the place where they preached the Law, discoursed of
;
righteousness, and discomfited (the advocates of) erroneous doctrines;

and fourth, the place where they came down, after going up to the Traya-
strimsas heaven to preach the Law for the benefit of their mothers.
Other places in connexion with them became remarkable, according to
the manifestations which were made at them at particular times.
The country of Kapilavastu is a great scene of empty desolation.
The inhabitants are few and far between. On the roads people have
to be on their guard against white elephants" and lions, and should
not travel incautiously.
CHAPTER XXin.
RAMA, AND ITS TOPE.
East from Buddha's birthplace, and at a distance of five yojanas, there
is a kingdom called Rama^. The king
of this country, having obtained
one portion of the Buddha's body*, returned with it and built
relics of
over it a tope, named the Rama tope. By the side of it there was a
pool, and in the pool a dragon, which constantly kept watch over (the
tope), and presented offerings at it day and night. When king Asoka
' See note 3, page 49. See also Davids' Manual, p. 45. The latter says,
that '
to turn the wheel of the Law means
'
'
to set rolling the royal chariot wheel
of a universal empire of truth and righteousness ; ' but he admits that this is more
grandiloquent than the phraseology was in the ears of Buddhists. I prefer the
words quoted from Eitel in the note referred to. '

They turned '
is probably equiva-
lent to '
They began to turn.'
^ Fa-hien does not say that he himself saw any of these white elephants,
nor does he speak of the lions as of any particular colour. We shall find by-
and-by, in a note further on, that, to make them appear more terrible, they are
spoken of as 'black.'
^ Rama or Ramagrama, between Kapilavastu and Kusanagara.
* See the account of the eightfold division of the relics of Buddha's body in
the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, Buddhist Suttas, pp. 133-136.
THE TOPE OF RAMA. 69
came forth into the world, he wished to destroy the eight topes (over the
reHcs), and to build (instead of them) 84,000 topes ^. After he had
thrown down the seven (others), he wished next to destroy this tope.
But then the dragon showed itself, took the king into its palace ^ and ;
when he had seen all the things provided for offerings, it said to him,
' If you are able with your offerings to exceed these, you can destroy
the tope, and take it all away. I will not contend with you.' The
king, however, knew that such appliances for offerings were not to be
had anywhere in the world, and thereupon returned (without carrying
out his purpose).
(After^vards), the ground all about became overgrown with vegetation,
and there was nobody to sprinkle and sweep (about the tope) but a ;
herd of elephants came regularly, which brought water with their trunks
to water the ground, and various kinds of flowers and incense, which
they presented at the tope. (Once) there came from one of the king-
doms a devotee^ to worship at the tope. When he encountered the
elephants he was greatly alarmed, and screened himself among the trees
but when he saw them go through with the offerings in the most proper
manner, the thought filled him with great sadness that there should be —
no monastery here, (the inmates of which) might serve the tope, but the
elephants have to do the watering and sweeping. Forthwith he gave up
the great prohibitions (by which he was bound)*, and resumed the status
of a Sramanera^. With his own hands he cleared away the grass and
trees, put the place in good order, and made it pure and clean. By
the power of his exhortations, he prevailed on the king of the country to
' The bones of the human body are supposed to consist of 84,000 atoms, and
hence the legend of Asoka's wish to build 84,000 topes, one over each atom
of Sakyamuni's skeleton.
^ Fa-hien, it appears to me, intended his readers to understand that the naga-
guardian had a palace of his own, inside or underneath the pool or tank.
' It stands out on the narrative as a whole that we have not here '
some
pilgrims,' but one devotee.
* What the '
great prohibitions ' which the devotee now gave up were we cannot
tell. Being what he was, a monk of more than ordinary ascetical habits, he may
have undertaken peculiar and difficult vows.
^ The Sramanera, or in Chinese Shamei. See note 7, page 45.
7° THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
form a residence for monks and when that was done, he became head
;
of the monastery. At the present day there are monks residing in it.
This event is of recent occurrence but in all the succession from ;
that time till now, there has always been a Sramanera head of the
establishment.
CHAPTER XXIV.
WHERE BUDDHA FINALLY RENOUNCED THE WORLD, AND WHERE
HE DIED.
East from here four yojanas, there is the place where the heir-apparent
sent back Chandaka, with his white horse ^ ; and there also a tope was
erected.
Four yojanas to the east from this, (the travellers) came to the Charcoal
tope ^, where there is also a monastery.
Going on twelve yojanas, still to the east, they came to the city of Kusa-
nagara ^, on the north of which, between two trees *, on the bank of
the Nairanjana ^ river, is the place where the World-honoured one, with
his head to the north, attained to pari-nirvana (and died). There
^ This was on the night when Sakyamuni finally left his palace and
family to fulfil the course to which he felt that he was called. Chandaka,
in Pali Channa, was the prince's charioteer, and in sympathy with him. So
also was the white horse Kanthaka (Kanthakanam Asvaraja), which neighed his
delight till the devas heard him. See M. B., pp. 158-161, and Davids' Manual,
pp. 32, 33. According to 'Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 87, the noble horse never
returned to the city, but died of grief at being left by his master, to be reborn
immediately in the Trayastrimsas heaven as the deva Kanthaka !
^ Beal and Giles call this the '

Ashes ' tope. I also would have preferred to
call it so ; but the Chinese character is ^, not J5J<. R^musat has '
la tour des
charbons.' It was over the place of Buddha's cremation.

" In Pali Kusinara. It got its name from the Kusa grass (the poa cynosu-
roides); and its ruins are still extant, near Kusiah, 180 N.W. from Patna;
'about,' says Davids, '
120 miles N. N. E. of Benares, and 80 miles due east of
Kapilavastu.'
* The âla tree, the Shorea robusta, which yields the famous teak wood.
^ Confounded, according to Eitel, even by Hsiian-chwang, with the Hiranya-
vati, which flows past the city on the south.
VII. BUDDHA'S DYING INSTRUCTIONS.
VIII. BUDDHA S DEATH.
f h.
IX. DIVISION OF HUDIJH.A S KKLICS. :14.
DEA TH OF B UDDHA J i
also are the places where Subhadra \ the last (of his converts), attained
to Wisdom (and became an Arhat) where ; in his coffin of gold they made
offerings to the World-honoured one for seven days^, where the Vajrapani
laid aside his golden club'^, and where the eight kings divided the relics
(of the burnt body)*: —
at all these places were built topes and monas-
teries, all of which are now existing.
In the city the inhabitants are few and far between, comprising only
the families belonging to the (different) societies of monks.
Going from this to the south-east for twelve yojanas, they came
to the place where the Lichchhavis^ wished to follow Buddha to (the
^ A Brahman of Benares, said to have been 120 years old, who came to learn
from Buddha the very night he died. Ananda would have repulsed him ; but
Buddha ordered him to be introduced ; and then putting aside the ingenious but
unimportant question which he propounded, preached to him the Law. The
Brahman was converted and attained at once to Arhatship. Eitel says that he
attained to nirvana a few moments before Sakyamuni but see the full account of ;
him and his conversion in 'Buddhist Suttas,' pp. 103-110.

Thus treating the dead Buddha as if he had been a Chakravartti king.
"^
Hardy's M. B., p. 347, says —

'For the place of cremation, the princes (of Kusindra)
:
offered their own coronation-hall, which was decorated with the utmost magnifi-
cence, and the body was deposited in a golden sarcophagus.' See the account of
a cremation which Fa-hien witnessed in Ceylon, chap, xxxix.
' The name Vajrapani is explained as 'he who holds in his hand the
diamond club (or pestle=sceptre),' which is one of the many names of Indra or
Sakra. He therefore, that great protector of Buddhism, would seem to be
intended here ; but the difficulty with me is that neither in Hardy nor Rockhill,
nor any other writer, have I met with any manifestation of himself made by Indra
on this occasion. The princes of Kusanagara were called mallas, 'strong or
;
mighty heroes ' so also were those of Pava and Vaisali ; and a question arises
whether the language may not refer to some story which Fa-hien had heard,
something which they did on this great occasion. Vajrapani is also explained as
meaning '
the diamond mighty hero ; ' but the epithet of diamond '
' is not so appli-
cable to them as to Indra. The clause may hereafter obtain more elucidation.
* Of Kusanagara, Pava, Vaisali, and other kingdoms. Kings, princes, brah-
mans, — each wanted the whole relic ; but they agreed to an eightfold division
at the suggestion of the brahman Drona.
° These '
strong heroes ' were the chiefs of Vaisali, a kingdom and city, with
place of) his pari-nirvana, and where, when he would not listen to them
and they kept cleaving to him, unwilling to go away, he made to
appear a large and deep ditch which they could not cross over, and gave
them his alms-bowl, as a pledge of his regard, (thus) sending them back
to their families. There a stone pillar was erected with an account
of this event engraved upon it.
CHAPTER XXV.
VAl6ALt. THE TOPE CALLED 'WEAPONS LAID DOWN.' THE COUNCIL
OF VAIÂLI.
East from this city ten yojanas, (the travellers) came to the kingdom
of Vaisali. North of the city so named is a large forest, having in it
the double-galleried vihara ^ where Buddha dwelt, and the tope over
half the body of Ananda -. Inside the city the woman Ambapali^ built a
vihara in honour of Buddha, which is now standing as it was at first.
Three le south of the city, on the west of the road, (is the) garden
(which) the same Ambapali presented to Buddha, in which he might
an oligarchical constitution. They embraced Buddhism early, and were noted

for their peculiar attachment to Buddha. The second synod was held at Vaisali,
as related in the next chapter. The ruins of the city still exist at Bassahar, north of
Patna, the same, I suppose, as Besarh, twenty miles north of Hajipur. See Seal's
Revised Version, p. lii.
' It is difficult to tell what was the peculiar form of this vihara from which it got
its name ; something about the construction of its door, or cupboards, or galleries,
"^
See the explanation of this in the next chapter.
' Ambapali, Amrapali, or Amradarika, 'the guardian of the Amra (probably
the mango) tree,' is famous in Buddhist annals. See the account of her in M. B.,
pp. 456-8. She was a courtesan. She had been in manynarakas or hells, was
100,000 times a female beggar, and 10,000 times a prostitute ; but maintaining
perfect continence during the period of Kasyapa Buddha, Sakyamuni's predecessor,
she had been born a devi, and finally appeared in earth under an Amra tree in
Vaisali. There again she fell into her old ways, and had a son by king Bimbi-
sara but she was won over by Buddha to virtue and chastity, renounced the world,
;
and attained to the state of an Arhat. See the earliest account of Ambapali's pre-
sentation of the garden in '
Buddhist Suttas,' pp. 30-33, and the note there from
Bishop Bigandet on pp. 33, 34.
LEGEND OF THE BOWS AXD WEAPONS' TOPE. 73
reside. When Buddha was about to attain to his pari-nirvana, as he

was quitting the city by the west gate, he turned round, and, beholding
the city on his right, said to them, Here I have taken my last walk ^.'
'
Men subsequently built a tope at this spot.

Three le north-west of the city there is a tope called, ' Bows and
weapons laid down.' The reason why it got that name was this The
: —
inferior wife of a king, whose country lay along the river Ganges, brought
forth from her womb a ball of flesh. The superior wife, jealous of the
other, said, '
You have brought forth a thing of evil omen,' and imme-
diately it was put into a box of w'ood and thrown into the river. Farther
down the stream another king was walking and looking about, when he
saw the wooden box (floating) in the water. (He had it brought to him),
opened it, and found a thousand little boys, upright and complete, and
each one different from the others. He took them and had them brought
up. They grew- tall and large, and very daring and strong, crushing all
opposition in every expedition which they undertook. By and by they
attacked the kingdom of their real father, who became in consequence
greatly distressed and sad. His inferior wife asked what it was that made
him so, and he replied, That king has a thousand sons, daring and strong
'
beyond compare, and he wishes with them to attack my kingdom this ;
is what makes me sad.' The wife said, You need not be sad and '
sorrowful. Only make a high gallery on the w'all of the city on the
east and when the thieves come, I shall be able to make them retire.'
;
The king did as she said and when the enemies came, she said to them
;
from the tower, You are my sons why are you acting so unnaturally
'
;
and rebelliously ?' They replied, Who are you that say you are our '
mother.' If you do not believe me,' she said, look, all of you, towards
'
'
'
me, and open your mouths.' She then pressed her breasts with her two
hands, and each sent forth 500 jets of milk, which fell into the mouths of
the thousand sons. The thieves (thus) knew that she was their mother,
and laid down their bows and weapons-. The two kings, the fathers,
' Beal gives, '

In this place I have performed the last religious act of my
; ;
earthly career ' Giles, '
This is the last place I shall visit ' Rdmusat, ' C'est un
lieu oil je reviendrai bien longtemps apres ceci.' Perhaps the '
walk ' to which
Buddha referred had been for meditation.
* See the account of this legend in the note in M. B., pp. 235, 236, different, but
1
hereupon fell into reflection, and both got to be Pratyeka Buddhas*.
The tope of the two Pratyeka Buddhas is still existing.
In a subsequent age, when the World-honoured one had attained to
perfect Wisdom (and become Buddha), he said to his disciples, '
This
is the place where I indown my bow and weapons -.'
a former age laid
It was thus that subsequently men got to know (the fact), and raised the
tope on this spot, which in this way received its name. The thousand
littleboys were the thousand Buddhas of this Bhadra-kalpa^.
was by the side of the Weapons-laid-down tope that Buddha,
It '
'
having given up the idea of living longer, said to Ananda, In three '
months from this I will attain to pari-nirvana;' and king Mara* had
so fascinated and stupefied Ananda, that he was not able to ask Buddha
to remain longer in this world.
Three or four le east from this place there is a tope (commemorating
not less absurd. The first part of Fa-hien's narrative will have sent the thoughts
of some of my readers to the exposure of the infant Moses, as related in Exodus.
' See note 3, page 40.
" Thus Sakyamuni had been one of the thousand little boys who floated in
the box in the Ganges. How long back the former age was we cannot tell.
I suppose the tope of the two fathers who became Pratyeka Buddhas had been
built like the one commemorating the laying down of weapons after Buddha had
told his disciples of the strange events in the past.
' Bhadra-kalpa, 'the Kalpa of worthies or sages.' 'This,' says Eitel, p. 22,
'is a designation for a Kalpa of stability, so called because 1000 Buddhas appear
in the course of it. Our present period is a Bhadra-kalpa, and four Buddhas
have already appeared. It is to last 236 millions of years, but over 151 millions
have already elapsed.'
* '
The king of demons.' The "name Mara is explained by '
the murderer,'
'
the destroyer of virtue,' and similar appellations. '
He is,' says Eitel, '
the per-
sonification of lust, the god of love, sin, and death, the arch-enemy of goodness,
residing in the heaven Paranirmita Vasavartin on the top of the Kamadhatu.
He assumes difierent forms, especially monstrous ones, to tempt or frighten the
saints, or sends his daughters, or inspires wicked men like Devadatta or the Nir-
granthas to do his work. He is often represented with 100 arms, and riding on
an elephant.' The oldest form of the legend in this paragraph is in '
Buddhist
Suttas,' Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, pp. 41-55, where Buddha says that, if
Ananda had asked him thrice, he would have postponed his death.
COUNCIL OF VAISALI. 75
the following occurrence) :

—A hundred years after the pari -nirvana of
Buddha, some Bhikshus of Vaisali went wrong in the matter of the
disciplinary rules in ten particulars, and appealed for their justification
to what they said were the words of Buddha. Hereupon the Arhats and
Bhikshus observant of the rules, to the number in all of 700 monks,
examined afresh and collated the collection of disciplinary books'.
Subsequently men built at this place the tope (in question), which is still
existing.
CHAPTER XXVI.
REMARKABLE DEATH OF ANANDA.
Four yojanas on from this place to the east brought the travellers
to the confluence of the five rivers-. When Ananda was going from Ma-
gadha^ to Vaisali, wishing his pari-nirvana to take place (there), the
' Or the Vinaya-pitaka. The meeting referred to was an important one,

and is generally spoken of as the second Great Council of the Buddhist Church.
See, on the formation of the Buddhist Canon, Hardy's E. M., chap, xviii, and the
last chapter of Davids' Manual, on the History of the Order. The first Council
was that held at Rajagriha, shortly after Buddha's death, under the presidency of
Kasyapa; — say about b.c. 410. The second was that spoken of here say about ; —
B.C. 300. In Davids' Manual (p.216) we find the ten points of discipline, in which
the heretics (I can use that term here) claimed at least indulgence. Two meetings
were held to consider and discuss them. At the former the orthodox party barely
succeeded in carrying their condemnation of the laxer monks and a second and;
larger meeting, of which Fa-hien speaks, was held in consequence, and a more
emphatic condemnation passed. At the same time all the books and subjects of
seem to have undergone a
discipline careful revision.
The Corean text is clearer than the Chinese as to those who composed the
Council, — the Arhats and orthodox monks. The leader among them was a Yasas,
or Yasada, or Yedsaputtra, who had been a disciple of Ananda, and must
therefore have been a very old man.
' This spot does not appear to have been identified. It could not be far from
Patna.
^ Magadha was for some time the headquarters of Buddhism ; the holy land,
covered with viharas; a fact perpetuated, as has been observed in a previous
1 2
•j6 THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
devas informed king Ajatasatru^ of and the king immediately pursued

it,
him, in his own grand body of soldiers, and had reached

carriage, with a
the river. (On the other hand), the Lichchhavis of Vaisah' had heard that
Ananda was coming (to their citj^), and they on their part came to meet
him. (In this way), they all arrived together at the river, and Ananda
considered that, if he went forward, king Ajatasatru would be very
angr}', while, if he went back, the Lichchhavis would resent his conduct.
He thereupon in the very middle of the river burnt his body in a fiery
ecstasy of Samadhi^, and his pari-nirvana was attained. He divided
note, in the name of the present Behar, the southern portion of which corresponds
to the ancient kingdom of JNIagadhi.
^ In Singhalese, Ajasat. See the account of his conversion in M. B., pp.
321-326. He was the son of king Bimbisara, who was one of the first royal
converts to Buddhism. Ajasat murdered his father, or at least WTOUght his
death; and was at first opposed to Sakyamuni, and a favourer of Devadatta.
When converted, he became famous for his liberality in almsgiving.
"^
Eitel has a long article (pp. 114, 115) on the meaning of Samadhi, which is
one of the seven sections of wisdom (bodhyanga). Hardy defines it as meaning

'perfect tranquillity; 'Tumour, as 'meditative abstraction;' Burnouf, as 'self-control;'
and Edkins, as ' ecstatic reverie.' '
Samadhi,' says Eitel, '
signifies the highest
pitch of abstract, ecstatic meditation; a state of absolute indiff'erence to all influences
from within or without; a state of torpor of both the material and spiritual forces of
vitality; a sort of terrestrial nirvana, consistently culminating in total destruction
of life.' He then quotes apparently the language of the text, '
He consumed his
body by Agni (the fire of) Samadhi,' and says it is '
a common expression for
the effects of such ecstatic, ultra-mystic self-annihilation.' All this is simply '
a
darkening of counsel by words without knowledge.' Some facts concerning the
death of Ananda are hidden beneath the darkness of the phraseology, which it is
impossible for us to ascertain. By or in Samadhi he burns his bod)' in the very

middle of the river, and then he divides the relic of the burnt body into two parts
(for so e\idently Fa-hien intended his narration to be taken), and leaves one half
on each bank. The account of Ananda's death in Nien-ch'ang's History of '
Buddha and is much more extravagant.

the Patriarchs '
Crowds of men and devas
are brought together to witness it. The body is divided into four parts. One is
conveyed to the Tushita heaven; a second, to the palace of a certain Naga
king a third is given to Ajatasatru and the fourth to the Lichchhavis. What it
; ;
all really means I cannot tell.

'
PATiWA AND KING AS OKA. 77
his body (also) into two, (leaving) the half of it on each bank so that ;
each of the two kings got one half as a (sacred) relic, and took it back
(to his own capital), and there raised a tope over it.
CHAPTER XXVII.
PATALIPUTTRA OR PATNA, IN MAGADHA. KING ASOKA'S SPIRIT-
BUILT PALACE AND HALLS. THE BUDDHIST BRAHMAN, RADHA-
SAMI. DISPENSARIES AND HOSPITALS.
Having crossed the river, and descended south for a yojana, (the
travellers) town of Pataliputtra', in the kingdom of
came to the
Magadha, the where king Aôka^ ruled. The royal palace and
city
halls in the midst of the city, which exist now as of old, were all made
by spirits which he employed, and which piled up the stones, reared the
walls and gates, and executed the elegant carving and inlaid sculpture-
—
work, in a way which no human hands of this world could accomplish.
King Asoka had a younger brother who had attained to be an
Arhat, and resided on Gridhra-kuta hill, finding his delight in solitude
'
and quiet. The king, who sincerely reverenced him, wished and begged
him (to come and live) in his family, where he could supply all his
wants. The other, however, through his delight in the stillness of the
mountain, was unwilling to accept the invitation, on which the king
said to him, Only accept my invitation, and I will make a hill for you
'
inside the city.' Accordingly, he provided the materials of a feast,
'
The modern Patna, lat. 25° 28' N., Ion. 85° 15' E. The Sanskrit name
means The city of flowers.'
'
It is the Indian Florence.
' See note 5, page 31. Asoka transferred his court from Rajagriha to
Pataliputtra, and there, in the eighteenth year of his reign, he convoked the third
Great Synod, — according, at least, to southern Buddhism. It must have been held
a few years before b.c. 250; Eitel sa)'s in 246.
' '
The Vulture-hill; ' so called because Mara, according to Buddhist tradition,
once assumed the form of a vulture on it to interrupt the meditation of Ananda
or, more probably, because it was a resort of vultures. It was near Rajagriha, the
earlier capital of Asoka, so that Fa-hien connects a legend of it with his account of
Patna. It abounded in caverns, and was famous as a resort of ascetics.
called to him the and announced to them, 'To-morrow you will

spirits,
all receive my invitation but as there are no mats for you to sit on, let
;
each one bring (his own seat).' Next day the spirits came, each one
bringing with him a great rock, (like) a wall, four or five paces square,
(for a seat). When their sitting was over, the king made them form
a hill with the large stones piled on one another, and also at the foot of
the with five large square stones, to make an apartment, which
hill,
might be more than thirty cubits long, twenty cubits wide, and more
than ten cubits high.
Brahman ^ named Radha-sami^,
In this city there had resided a great
a professor of the mahayana, and much wisdom,
of clear discernment
who understood everything, living by himself in spotless purity. The
king of the country honoured and reverenced him, and served him as his
teacher. If he went to inquire for and greet him, the king did not
presume to sit down alongside of him and if, in his love and rever- ;
ence, he took hold of his hand, as soon as he let it go, the Brahman
made haste to pour water on it and wash it. He might be more than
fifty years old, and all the kingdom looked up to him. By means of
this one man, the Law of Buddha was widely made known, and the
followers of other doctrines did not find it in their power to persecute
the body of monks in any way.
By the side of the tope of Asoka, there has been made a maha-
yana monastery, very grand and beautiful there is also a hinayana one ;
;
the two together containing six hundred or seven hundred monks. The
rules of demeanour and the scholastic arrangements^ in them are worthy
of observation.
Shamans of the highest virtue from all quarters, and students, inquirers
^ A Brahman by caste, but a Buddhist in faith.

"^
So, by the help of Julian's '
M^thode,' I transliterate the Chinese characters
^^ 3ZC A^ ^'
and ^^.
-^^^^ gives Radhasvami, his
suppose the name was Radhasvami or Radhasami.

Chinese text having a ^ between
W^ I
^
^
and Mencius.
j^, the
Why
names of two kinds of schools, often occurring in the Li
should there not have been schools in those monasteries in
K\
India as there were in China ? Fa-hien himself grew up with other boys in a
monastery, and no doubt had to 'go to school.' And the next sentence shows us there
might be schools for more advanced students as well as for the ^ramaneras.
FESTIVALS AXD CHARITIES OF MAG AD HA. 79
wishing to find out truth and the grounds of it, all resort to these
monasteries. There also resides in this monastery a Brahman teacher,
whose name also is Maiijusri', whom the Shamans of greatest virtue in
the kingdom, and the mahayana Bhikshus honour and look up to.
The cities and towns of this country are the greatest of all in the
Middle Kingdom. The inhabitants are rich and prosperous, and vie
with one another in the practice of benevolence and righteousness.
Every year on the eighth day of the second month they celebrate a
procession of images. They make a four-wheeled car, and on it erect
a structure of five storeys by means of bamboos tied together. This is
supported by a king-post, with poles and lances slanting from and is it,
rather more than twenty cubits high, having the shape of a tope. White
and silk-like cloth of hair - is wrapped all round it, which is then painted
in various colours. They make figures of devas, with gold, silver, and
lapis lazuli grandly blended and having silken streamers and canopies
hung out over them. On the four sides are niches, with a Buddha seated
in each, and a Bodhisattva standing in attendance on him. There may
be twenty cars, all grand and imposing, but each one difterent from the
others. On the day mentioned, the monks and laity within the borders
all come together they have singers and skilful musicians they pay
; ;
their devotions with flowers and incense. The Brahmans come and
invite the Buddhas to enter the city. These do so in order, and remain
two nights in it. All through the night they keep lamps burning, have
skilful music, and present offerings. This is the practice in all the other
kingdoms as well. The Heads of the Vaisya families in them establish
in the cities houses for dispensing charity and medicines. All the poor
and destitute in the country, orphans, widowers, and childless men,
maimed people and cripples, and all who are diseased, go to those
houses, and are provided with every kind of help, and doctors examine
their diseases. They get the food and medicines which their cases
require, and are made to feel at ease and when they are better, they go
;
away of themselves.
When king Asoka destroyed the seven topes, (intending) to make
' See note i, page 4. It is perhaps with reference to the famous Bodhisattva
that the Brahman here is said to be '
also' named Mafiju5rJ.
* ? Cashmere cloth.
8o THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
eighty-four thousand ', the first which he made was the great tope, more
than three le to the south of this city. In front of this there is a foot-
print of Buddha, where a vihara has been built. The door of it faces the
north, and on the south of it there is a stone pillar, fourteen or fifteen
cubits in circumference, and more than thirty cubits high, on which there
is an inscription, saying, Asoka gave the jambudvipa to the general
'
body of all the monks, and then redeemed it from them with money.
This he did three times'.' North from the tope 300 or 400 paces, king
Aôka built the city of Ne-le^ In it there is a stone pillar, which also is
more than thirty feet high, with a lion on the top of it. On the pillar
there is an inscription recording the things which led to the building of
Ne-le, with the number of the year, the day, and the month.
CHAPTER XXVIII.
RAJAGRIHA, NEW AND OLD. LEGENDS AND INCIDENTS CONNECTED
WITH IT.
(The travellers) went on from this to the south-east for nine yojanas,
and came to a small solitary rocky hill *, at the head or end of which ^
was an apartment of stone, facing the south, the place where Buddha —
sat, when Sakra, Ruler of Devas, brought the deva-musician, Pancha-
' See note i, page 69.

' We wish that we had more particulars of this great transaction, and that
we knew what value in money Asoka set on the whole world. It is to be
obser\-ed that he gave it to the monks, and did not receive it from them. Their
right was from him, and he bought it back. He was the only '
Power ' that was.
^ We know nothing more of Ne-le. It could only have been a small place ; an
outpost for the defence of Pataliputtra.
* Called by Hsiian-chwang Indra-sila-guha, or '
The cavern of Indra.' It
has been identified with a hill near the village of Giryek, on the bank of the
PaSchana river, about thirty-six miles from Gaya. The hill terminates in two
peaks overhanging the river, and it is the more northern and higher of these
which Fa-hien had in mind. It bears an oblong terrace .covered with the ruins
of several buildings, especially of a vihara.
° This does not mean the top or summit of the hill, but its '
headland,' where
h ended at the river.
LEGENDS. NEW RAjAGRIHA. 8x
(îkha)\ to give pleasure to him by playing on his lute. Sakra then

asked Buddha about forty-two subjects, tracing (the questions) out with
his finger one by one on the rock ^. The prints of his tracing are still
there ; and here also there is a monastery.
A yojana south-west from this place brought them to the village of
Nala^, where Sariputtra* was born, and to which also he returned, and
attained here his pari-nirvana. Over the spot (where his body was
burned) there was built a tope, which is still in existence.
Another yojana to the west brought them to New Rajagriha^, the —
new city which was built by king Ajatasatru. There were two monas-
teries in it. Three hundred paces outside the west gate, king Ajata-
satru, having obtained one portion of the relics of Buddha, built (over
them) a tope, high, large, grand, and beautiful. Leaving the city by
the south gate, and proceeding south four le, one enters a valley, and
comes to a circular space formed by five hills, which stand all round
' See the account of this visit of Sakra in M. B., pp. 288-290. It is from
Hardy that we are able to complete here the name of the musician, which appears
in Fa-hien as only Paficha, or 'Five.' His harp or lute, we are told, was
'
twelve miles long.'
'^
Hardy (M. B., pp. 288, 289) makes the subjects only thirteen, which are still
to be found in one of the Sutras (' the Dik-Sahga, in the Sakra-prasna SQtra ').
Whether it was Sakra who wrote his questions, or Buddha who wrote the answers,
depends on the punctuation. It seems better to make Sakra the writer.
' Or Nalanda; identified with the present Baragong. A grand monastery
was subsequently built at it, famous by the residence for five years of Hsiian-
chwang.
* See note 3, page 44. There is some doubt as to the statement that Nala
was his birthplace.
;
" The city of '
Royal Palaces ' 'the residence of the Magadha kings from
Bimbisara to Asoka, the first metropolis of Buddhism, at the foot of the Gridhra-
kflta mountains. Here the first s}'nod assembled within a year after Sakyarauni's
death. Its ruins are still extant at the village of Rajghir, sixteen miles S.W. of
Behar, and form an object of pilgrimage to the Jains (E. H., p. 100).' It is called
New Rajagriha to distinguish it from Kusagarapura, a few miles from it, the old
residence of the kings. Eitel says it was built by Bimbisara, while Fa-hien
ascribes it to Ajatasatru. I suppose the son finished what the father had begun.
82 THE TRAVELS OF FA -HIEN.
and have the appearance of the suburban wall of a city. Here was
it,
the old city of king Bimbisara^ from east to west about five or six le, and
;
from north to south seven or eight. It was here that Sariputtra and Maud-
galyayana first saw Upasena^; that the Nirgrantha^ made a pit of fire
and poisoned the rice, and then invited Buddha (to eat with him) that ;
king Ajatasatru made a black elephant intoxicated with liquor, wish-

ing him to injure Buddha * and that at the north-east corner of the city
;
in a (large) curving (space) Jivaka built a vihara in the garden of Amba-

pali^, and invited Buddha with his 1250 disciples to it, that he might
there make his offerings to support them. (These places) are still there
as of old, but inside the city all is emptiness and desolation ; no man
dwells in it.
CHAPTER XXIX.
GRIDHRA-KUTA HILL, AND LEGENDS. FA-HIEN PASSES
A NIGHT ON IT. HIS REFLECTIONS.
Entering the valley, and keeping along the mountains on the south-
east, after ascending fifteen le, (the travellers) came to mount Gridhra-
• See note 5, p. 81.

' One of the five first followers of Sakyamuni. He is also called Asvajit ; in
Pali Assaji; but Asvajit seems to be a military title = '

Master or trainer of horses.'
The two more famous disciples met him, not to lead him, but to be directed
by him, to Buddha. See Sacred Books of the East, vol. xiii, Vinaya Texts,
pp. 144-147-
' One of the si.x Tirthyas (T!rthakas = ' erroneous teachers;' M. B., pp. 290-
292, but I have not found the particulars of the attempts on Buddha's life referred
to by Fa-hien), or Brahmanical opponents of Buddha. He was an ascetic, one of
the Jnati clan, and is therefore called Nirgranthajuad. He taught a system of

fatalism, condemned the use of clothes, and thought he could subdue all passions
by fasting. He had a body of followers, who called themselves by his name
and were the forerunners of the Jains.
(Eitel, pp. 84, 85),
* The king was moved
to this by Devadatta. Of course the elephant disap-
pointed them, and did homage to Sakyamuni. See Sacred Books of the East,
vol. XX, Vinaya Texts,247. p.
° See note Jivaka was Ambapali's son by king Bimbisara, and devoted
3, p. 72.
himself to the practice of medicine. See the account of him in the Sacred Books
of the East, vol. xvii, Vinaya Texts, pp. 1 71-194.
FA-HIEN'S NIGHT ON GRIDHRA-KUTA HILL. 83
kuta ^. Three le before you reach the top, there is a cavern in the
rocks, facing the south, in which Buddha sat in meditation. Thirty
paces to the north-west there is another, where Ananda was sitting in
meditation, when the deva Mara Pisuna^, having assumed the form
of a large vulture, took his place in front of the cavern, and
frightened the disciple. Then Buddha, by his mysterious, supernatural
power, made a cleft in the rock, introduced his hand, and stroked Ananda's
shoulder, so that his fear immediately passed away. The footprints of
the bird and the cleft for (Buddha's) hand are still there, and hence
comes the name of '
The Hill of the Vulture Cavern.'
In front of the cavern there are the places where the four Buddhas
sat. There are caverns also of the Arhats, one where each sat and
meditated, amounting to several hundred in all. At the place where in
front of his rocky apartment Buddha was walking from east to west (in
meditation), and Devadatta, from among the beetling cliffs on the north
of the mountain, threw a rock across, and hurt Buddha's toes *, the rock
is still there *.
The hall where Buddha preached his Law has been destroyed, and
only the foundations of the brick walls remain. On this hill the peak is
beautifully green, and rises grandly up ; it is the highest of all the five
hills. In the New City Fa-hien bought incense-(sticks), flowers, oil
and lamps, and hired two bhikshus, long resident (at the place), to carry
them (to the peak). When he himself got to it, he made his offerings
with the flowers and incense, and lighted the lamps when the darkness
began to come on. He felt melancholy, but restrained his tears and
said, '
Here Buddha delivered the Surangama (Sutra) °. I, Fa-hien,
was bom when I could not meet with Buddha and now I only see the ;

' See note 4, p. 74. Pisuna is a name given to IMara, and signifies '
sinful lust.'
° See M. B., p. 320. Hardy says that Devadatta's attempt was 'by the help of
a machine;' but the oldest account in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, Vinaya
Texts, p. 245, agrees with what Fa-hien implies that he threw the rock with his
own arm.
* And, as described by Hsiian-chwang, fourteen or fifteen cubits high, and
thirty paces round.
' See Mr. Bunyiu Nanjios 'Catalogue of the Chinese Translation of the Buddhist
footprints which he has left, and the place where he lived, and nothing
more.' With this, in front of the rock cavern, he chanted the Sura li gam a
Sutra, remained there over the night, and then returned towards the
New City ^
CHAPTER XXX.
THE ^RATAPARNA CAVE, OR CAVE OF THE FIRST COUNCIL.
LEGENDS. SUICIDE OF A BHIKSHU.
Out from the old city, after walking over 300 paces, on the west of
the road, (the travellers) found the Karanda Bamboo garden^, where the
(old) vihara is still in existence, with a company of monks, who keep
(the ground about it) swept and watered.
North of the vihara two or three le there was the Smaânam, which
name means in Chinese the field of graves into which the dead are
'
thrown ^.'
Tripitaka,' Siltra Pitaka, Nos. 399, 446. It was the former of these that came on
this occasion to the thoughts and memory of Fa-hien.
' In a note (p. Ix) to his revised version of our author, Mr. Beal says, '
There
is a full account of this perilous visit of Fa-hien, and how he was attacked by
tigers, in the " History of the High Priests."' But '
the high priests ' merely means
distinguished monks, 'eminent monks,' as Mr. Nanjio exactly renders the ad-
jectival character. Nor was Fa-hien attacked by tigers' on the peak. No tigers'
' '
appear in the Memoir. Two black lions' indeed crouched before him for a time
'
;
this night, ' licking their lips and waving their tails but their appearance was to
'
'try,' and not to attack him; and when they saw him resolute, they 'drooped their
heads, put down their tails, and prostrated themselves before him.' This of course
is not an historical account, but a legendary tribute to his bold perseverance.
^ Karanda Venuvana; a park presented to Buddha by king Bimbisara,
who vihara in it. See the account of the transaction in M. B.,
also built a
p. 194. The place was called Karanda, from a creature so named, which awoke
the king just as a snake was about to bite him, and thus saved his life. In Hardy
the creature appears as a squirrel, but Eitel says that the Karanda is a bird of a
sweet voice, resembhng a magpie, but herding in flocks; the cuculus melano-
leucus. See 'Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 118.
' The language here is rather contemptuous, as if our author had no sympathy
THE FIRST COUNCIL. SUICIDE OF A BHIKSHU. 85
As they kept along the mountain on the south, and went west for 300
paces, they found a dwelHng among the rocks, named the Pippala
cave^ in which Buddha regularly sat in meditation after taking his
(midday) meal.
Going on still to the west for five or six le, on the north of the hill, in
the shade, they found the cavern called Srataparna^, the place where,
after thenirvana^ of Buddha, 500 Arhats collected the Sutras. When
they brought the Sutras forth, three lofty seats * had been prepared and
grandly ornamented. Sariputtra occupied the one on the left, and
Maudgalyayana that on the right. Of the number of five hundred one
was wanting. Mahakasyapa was president (on the middle seat).
Ananda was then outside the door, and could not get in^. At the place
there was (subsequently) raised a tope, which is still existing.
Along (the sides of) the hill, there are also a very great many cells
among the rocks, where the various Arhans sat and meditated. As you
with any other mode of disposing of the dead, but by his own Buddhistic method
of cremation.
' The Chinese characters used for the name of this cavern serve also to
name the pippala (peepul) tree, the ficus religiosa. They make us think that
there was such a tree overshadowing the cave ; but Fa-hien would hardly have
neglected to mention such a circumstance.
''
A very great place in the annals of Buddhism. The Council in the Srata-
parna cave did not come together fortuitously, but appears to have been
convoked by the older members to settle the rules and doctrines of the order.
The cave was prepared for the occasion by king Ajatasatru. From the expression
about the 'bringing forth of the King,' it would seem that the Sfltras or some
of them had been already committed to writing. INIay not the meaning of King
(«^) here be extended to the Vinaya rules, as well as the Siitras, and mean 'the
standards ' of the system generally ? See Davids' Manual, chapter ix, and Sacred
Books of the East, vol. xx,Vinaya Texts, pp. 370-385.
' So in the text, evidently for pari-nirvana.
' Instead of '
high ' seats, the Chinese texts have '
vacant.' The character for
'prepared' denotes 'spread;' — they were carpeted; perhaps, both cushioned and
carpeted, being rugs spreadon the ground, raised higher than the other places for seats.
' Did they not contrive to let him in, with some cachinnation, even in so
august an assembly, that so important a member should have been shut out 'i
86 J HE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
leave the old city on the north, and go down east for three le, there is
the rock dwelling of Devadatta, and at a distance of fifty paces from

it there is a large, square, black rock. Formerly there was a bhikshu,
who, as he walked backwards and forwards upon it, thought with himself:
'This body^ is impermanent, a thing of bitterness and vanity", and which
cannot be looked on as pure^. I am weary of this body, and troubled by
it as an evil/ With this he grasped a knife, and was about to kill him-
self. But he thought again :
— ' The World-honoured one laid down a
prohibition against one's killing himself*.' Further it occurred to him :
'
Yes, he did ; but I now only wish to kill three poisonous thieves ^.'
Immediately with the knife he cut his throat. With the first gash into
the flesh he attained the state of a Srotapanna ^ when he had gone ;
half through, he attained to be an Anagamin' and when he had cut right ;
through, he was an Arhat, and attained to pari-nirvana* (and died). ;
^ '
The life of this body ' would, I think, fairly express the idea of the
bhikshu.
^ See the account of Buddha's preaching in chapter xviii.
' The sentiment of this clause is not easily caught.

* See E. M., p. 152 :
— 'Buddha made a law forbidding the monks to commit
suicide. He prohibited any one from discoursing on the miseries of life in
such a manner as to cause desperation.' See also M. B., pp. 464, 465.
^ Beal says :
— ' Evil desire ; hatred ; ignorance.'
* See note 2, p. 57.
' The Anagamin belong to the third degree of Buddhistic saintship, the
third class of Aryas (note 2, page 57), who are no more liable to be reborn as
men, but are to be born once more as devas, when they will forthwith become
Arhats, and attain to nirvana. E. H., pp. 8, 9,
Our author expresses no opinion of his own on the act of this bhikshu.
*
Must it not have been a good act, when it was attended, in the very act of per-
formance, by such blessed consequences ? But if Buddhism had not something
better to show than what appears here, it would not attract the interest which it
now does. The bhikshu was evidently rather out of his mind ; and the verdict
of a coroner's inquest of this nineteenth century would have pronounced that he
killed himself '
in a fit of insanity.'
IV. BUDDHA IN SOLITUDE AND ENDURING AUSTERITIES. Ch. 31.
THE ATTAlNMEXr OF THE BUDDHASHIP. 87
CHAPTER XXXI.
GAYA. SAKYAMUXl'S ATTAINING TO THE BUDDHASHIP ; AND
OTHER LEGENDS.
From this place, after travelling to the west for four yojanas, (the
pilgrims) came to the city of Gaya
all was empti-
* ; but inside the city
ness and desolation. Going on again to the south for twenty le, they
arrived at the place where the Bodhisattva for six years practised with
himself painful austerities. All around was forest.
Three le west from here they came to the place where, when Buddha
had gone into the water to bathe, a deva bent down the branch of a tree,
by means of which he succeeded in getting out of the pool".
Two le north from this was the place where the Gramika girls pre-
sented to Buddha the rice-gruel made with milk'^; and two le north
from this (again) was the place where, seated on a rock under a great
tree, and facing the east, he ate (the gruel). The tree and the rock are
there at the present day. The rock may be six cubits in breadth and
length, and rather more than two cubits in height. In Central India the
cold and heat are so equally tempered that trees will live in it for several
thousand and even for ten thousand years.
Half a yoj ana from this place to the north-east there was a cavern in
' Gaya, a city of Magadha, was north-west of the present Gayah (lat. 24° 47' N.,
Ion. 85° I'E.). It was here that Sakyamuni lived for seven years, after quitting his
family, until he attained to Buddhaship. The place is still frequented by pilgrims.
E. H., p. 41.
^ This is told so as to make us think that he was in danger of being drowned;
but this does not appear in the only other account of the incident I have met
with, — in 'The Life of the Buddha,' p. 31. And he was not yet Buddha, though
he is here called so ; unless indeed the narrative is confused, and the incidents do
not follow in the order of time.
' An incident similar to this is told, with many additions, in Hardy's M. B.,
pp. 166-168 ;
'
The Life of the Buddha,' p. 30 ; and the '
Luddhist Binh Stories,'
pp. 91, 92 ; but the name of the ministering girl or girls is different. I take
Gramika from a note in Beal's revised version ; it seems to me a happy solution

of the difficulty caused hy the §|3 ^ of Fa-hien.
88 THE TRA VELS OF FA-HI EN.
the rocks, into which the Bodhisattva entered, and sat cross-legged with
his face to the west. (As he did so), he said to himself, 'If I am to attain
to perfect wisdom (and become Buddha), let there be a supernatural
attestation of it.' On the wall of the rock there appeared immediately
the shadow of a Buddha, rather more than three feet in length, which is
still bright at the present day. At this moment heaven and earth were
greatly moved, and devas in the air spoke plainly, This is not the place '
where any Buddha of the past, or he that is to come, has attained, or will
attain, to perfect Wisdom. Less than half a yojana from this to the
south-west will bring you to the patra^ tree, where all past Buddhas
have attained, and all to come must attain, to perfect Wisdom.' When
they had spoken these words, they immediately led the way forwards to
the place, singing as they did so. As they thus went away, the Bodhisattva
arose and walked (after them). At a distance of thirty paces from the
tree, a deva gave him the grass of lucky omen ^, which he received and went
on. After (he had proceeded) fifteen paces, 500 green birds came flying
towards him, went round him thrice, and disappeared. The Bodhisattva
went forward to the patra tree, placed the kuâ grass at the foot of it,
and sat down with his face to the east. Then king Mara sent three
beautiful young ladies, who came from the north, to tempt him, while he
himself came from the south to do the same. The Bodhisattva put
his toes down on the ground, and the demon soldiers retired and
dispersed, and the three young ladies were changed into old (grand-)
mothers ^.
At the place mentioned above of the six years' painful austerities, and
at all these other places, men subsequently reared topes and set up
images, which all exist at the present day.
Where Buddha, after attaining to perfect wisdom, for seven days
contemplated the tree, and experienced the joy of vimukti *; where, under
;
' Called '
the tree of leaves,' and '
the tree of reflection ' a palm tree, the
borassus flabellifera, described as a tree which never loses its leaves. It is
often confounded with the pippala. E. H., p. 92.

" The kusa grass, mentioned in a previous note.
' See the account of this contest with Mara in M. B., pp. 1 71-179, and
'Buddhist Birth Stories,' pp. 96-101.
V. BUDDHASHIP ATTAINED.
AFTER THE A TTA IXMEXT OF THE BUDDHA SHIP. 89
the patra he walked backwards and forwards from west to east for
tree,
seven days; where the devas made a hall appear, composed of the
seven precious substances, and presented offerings to him for seven days ;
where the blind dragon Muchilinda' encircled him for seven days where ;
he sat under the nyagrodha tree, on a square rock, with his face to the
east, and Brahma-deva ^ came and made his request to him where the ;
four deva kings brought to him their alms-bowls^; where the 500 mer-
chants* presented to him the roasted flour and honey; and where he
converted the brothers Kasyapa and their thousand disciples^; —at all
these places topes were reared.

At the place where Buddha attained to perfect Wisdom, there are
three monasteries, in all of which there monks residing. The
are
families of their peoplearound supply the societies of these monks with an
abundant what they require, so that there is no lack or stints
sufficiency of
The disciplinary rules are strictly observed by them. The laws regulating
their demeanour in sitting, rising, and entering when the others are
assembled, are those which have been practised by all the saints since
' Called also Maha, or the Great Muchilinda. Eitel says: ' A naga king, the
tutelary deity of a lake near which âkyamuni once sat for seven days absorbed
in meditation, whilst the king guarded him.' The account (p. 35) in '
The Life of
the Buddha' is:
— 'Buddha went to where lived the naga king IMuchilinda, and he,
wishing to preser\'e him from the sun and rain,wrapped his body seven times
round him, and spread out his hood over his head and there he remained seven
;
days So also the Nidana Katha, in Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 109.

in thought.' '
' This was Brahma himself, though 'king' is omitted. What he requested of the
Buddha was that he would begin the preaching of his Law. Nidana Katha, p. 1 11.
* The other accounts mention only two ; but in M. B., p. 182, and the Nidana
Katha, p. no, 500 well-laden waggons with them.
these two have
^ These must not be confounded with Mahaka^yapa of note
5, p. 45. They
were three brothers, Uruvilva, Gaya, and Nadi-Kasyapa, up to this dme holders
of erroneous
'
views, having 500, 300, and 200 disciples respectively.
' They
became distinguished followers of bakyamuni and are each of them to become
; — —
Buddha by-and-by. See the Nidana Katha, pp. 114, 115.
' This seems to be the meaning ; but I do not wonder that some understand
the sentence of the benevolence of the monkish population to the travellers.
Buddha was in the world down to the present day. The places of the
four great topes have been fixed, and handed down without break, since
Buddha attained to nirvana. Those four great topes are those at the places
where Buddha was born where he attained to Wisdom where he (began
; ;
to) move the wheel of his Law; and where he attained to pari -nirvana.
CHAPTER XXXII.
LEGEND OF KING ASOKA IN A FORMER BIRTH, AND HIS
NARAKA.
When king Asoka, in a former birth \ was a boy and playing on little
the road, he met Kasyapa Buddha walking. (The stranger) begged

food, and the boy pleasantly took a handful of earth and gave it to him.
The Buddha took the earth, and returned it to the ground on which
he was walking; but because of this (the boy) received the recompense
of becoming a king of the iron wheel-, to rule over Jambudvipa.
(Once) when he was making a judicial tour of inspection through
Jambudvipa, he saw, between the iron circuit of the two hills, a naraka^
for the punishment of wicked men. Having thereupon asked his ministers
what sort of a thing it was, they replied, It belongs to Yama *, king of '
for a former age ; and not merely a former time. Perhaps a former birth
' '
is the
best translation. The Corean reading of Kasyapa Buddha is certainly preferable
to the Chinese '
Sakj'a Buddha.'
'^
See note 3, p. 49.
^ I prefer to retain the Sanskrit term here, instead of translating the Chinese
text by 'Earth's prison {]^ M^)'' o^" '
'^ prison in the earth;' the name which has
been adopted generally by Christian missionaries in China for gehenna and
hell.
* Eitel (p. 173) says: — 'Yama was originally the Aryan god of the dead,
living in a heaven above the world, the regent of the south but Brahmanism
;
transferred his abode to hell. Both views have been retained by Buddhism.'
The Yama of the te.xt is the 'regent of the narakas, residing south of Jambu-
dvipa, outside the Chakravalas (the double circuit of mountains above), in a palace
built of brass and iron, He has a sister who controls all the female culprits, as
AÔHrJS .XA/iAA'A. 91
demons, for punishing wicked people/ The king thought within himself :
'
(Even) the king of demons is able to make a naraka in which to deal
with wickedmen why should not I, who am the lord of men, make a
;
naraka which to deal with wicked men?' He forthwith asked his

in
ministers who could make for him a naraka and preside over the punish-
ment of wicked people in it. They replied that it was only a man of extreme
wickedness who could make it and the king thereupon sent officers to
;
seek e\-erywhere for (such) a bad man and they saw by the side of a
;
pond a man tall and strong, with a black countenance, yellow hair, and
green ej'es, hooking up the fish with his feet, while he called to him
birds and beasts, and, when they came, then shot and killed them,
so that not one escaped. Having got this man, they took him to the
king, who secretly charged him, You must make a square enclosure
'
with high walls. Plant in it all kinds of flowers and fruits make good ;
ponds in it for bathing make it grand and imposing in every way, so that
;
men it w ith thirsting desire

shall look to make its gates strong and ;
sure and when any one enters, instantly seize him and punish him as
;
a sinner, not allowing him to get out. Even if I should enter, punish
me as a sinner in the same way, and do not let me go. I now appoint
you master of that naraka.'
Soon after this a bhikshu, pursuing his regular course of begging his
food, entered the gate (of the place). When the lictors of the naraka
saw him, they w'ere about to subject him to their tortures but he, ;
frightened, begged them to allow him a moment in which to eat his

midday meal. Immediately after, there came in another man, whom they
thrust into a mortar and pounded till a red froth overflowed. As the
bhikshu looked on, there came to him the thought of the impermanence,
the painful sufiering and inanity of this body, and how it is but as a
bubble and as foam and instantly he attained to Arhatship. Imme-
;
diately after, the lictors seized him, and threw him into a caldron of
he exclusively deals with the male sex. Three times, however, in every twenty-
four hours, a demon pours boiling copper into Yama's mouth, and squeezes it
down his throat, causing him unspeakable pain.' Such, however, is the wonderful
'
transrotation of births,' that when Yama's sins have been expiated, he is to be
reborn as Buddha, under the name of '
The Universal King.'
boiling water. There was a look of joyful satisfaction, however, in
the bhikshu's countenance. The fire was extinguished, and the water
became cold. In the middle (of the caldron) there rose up a lotus
flower, with the bhikshu seated on it. The lictors at once went and
reported to the king that therewas a marvellous occurrence in the
naraka, and wished him go and see it; but the king said, I formerly-
to '
made such an agreement that now I dare not go (to the place).' The
lictors said, This is not a small matter.
'
Your majesty ought to go
quickly. Let your former agreement be altered.' The king thereupon
followed them, and entered (the naraka), when the bhikshu preached
the Law to him, and he believed, and was made free^. Forthwith he
demolished the naraka, and repented of all the evil which he had for-
merly done. From this time he believed in and honoured the Three
Precious Ones, and constantly went to a patra tree, repenting under it,
with self-reproach, of his errors, and accepting the eight rules of abstinence^.
The queen asked where the king was constantly going to, and the
ministers replied that he was constantly to be seen under (such and such)
a patra tree. She watched for a time when the king was not there, and
then sent men to cut the tree down. When the king came, and saw
what had been done, he swooned away with sorrow, and fell to the
ground. His ministers sprinkled water on his face, and after a consider-
able time he revived. He then built all round (the stump) with bricks,
and poured a hundred pitchers of cows' milk on the roots and as he ;
lay with his four limbs spread out on the ground, he took this oath, If '
the tree do not live, I will never rise from this.' When he had uttered
this oath, the tree immediately began to grow from the roots, and it has
continued to grow till now, when it is nearly lOo cubits in height.
CHAPTER XXXHL
MOUNT GURUPADA, WHERE KASYAPA BUDDHA'S ENTIRE SKELETON IS.
(The going on from this three le to the south, came

travellers),
to a mountain named Gurupada^, inside which Mahakasyapa even
;
' Or, '
was loosed ' from the bonds, I suppose, of his various illusions.
" I have not met with this particular numerical category.
' '
Fowl's-foot hill,' '
with three peaks, resembling the foot of a chicken. It lies
SKELETOX OF KASFAPA BUDDHA IX MOUNTAIX. 93
now is. He made a cleft, and went down into it, though the place
where he entered would not (now) admit a man. Having gone down
very far, there was a hole on one side, and there the complete body
of Kasjâpa (still) abides. Outside the hole (at which he entered) is the
earth with which he had washed his hands ^. If the people living there-
abouts have a sore on their heads, they plaster on it some of the earth
from this, and feel immediately easier ^. On this mountain, now as of
old, there are Arhats abiding. Devotees of our Law from the various
countries in that quarter go year by year to the mountain, and present
ofiferings to Kasyapa and to those whose hearts are strong in faith there
;
come Arhats at night, and talk with them, discussing and explaining their
doubts, and disappearing suddenly afterwards.
On this hill hazels grow luxuriantly and there are many lions, ;
tigers, and wolves, so that people should not travel incautiously.
CHAPTER XXXIV.
OX THE WAY BACK TO PATNA. V.A.R.\XASI, OR BENARES. i^.^KVA-
MUN'l'S FIRST DOINGS AFTER BECOMING BUDDHA.
Fa-hien^ returned (from here) towards Pataliputtra*, keeping along
the course of the Ganges and descending in the direction of the west.
seven miles south-east of Gaya, and was the residence of Mahakasyapa, who is
said to be still So Eitel says, p. 58 but this chapter

living inside this mountain.' ;
does not say that Kasjapa is in the mountain alive, but that his body entire is in
a recess or hole in it. Hardy (M. B., p. 97) says that after Kasyapa Buddha's
body was burnt, the bones sdll remained in their usual position, presenring the
appearance of a perfect skeleton. It is of him that the chapter speaks, and

not of the famous disciple of âkyamuni, who also is called Mahakasyapa. This
will appear also on a comparison of Eitel's articles on ' Mahakasyapa and '
'
Ka-
syapa Buddha.'
' Was it a custom to wash the hands with 'earth,' as is often done with sand.'
' This I conceive to be the meaning here.
' Fa-hien is here mentioned singly, as in the account of his visit to the cave
on Gridhra-kflta. I think that Tao-ching may have remained at Patna after their
first visit to it.

94 THE TRA VELS OF FA-HI EN.
After going ten yojanas he found a vihara, named 'The Wilderness,'
a place where Buddha had dwelt, and where there are monks now.
Pursuing the same course, and going still to the west, he arrived,
after twelve yojanas, at the city of Varanasi' in the kingdom of Kasi.
Rather more than ten le to the north-east of the city, he found the
vihara in the park of 'The rishi's Deer-wild^.' In this park there formerly
resided a Pratyeka Buddha^, with whom the deer were regularly in
the habit of stopping for the night. When the World-honoured one was
about to attain to perfect Wisdom, the devas sang in the sky, ' The
son of king Suddhodana, having quitted his family and studied the
Path (of Wisdom)*, will now in seven days become Buddha.' The Pra-
tyeka Buddha heard their words, and immediately attained to nirvana;
and hence was named 'The Park of the rishi's Deer-wild^.'
this place
After the World-honoured one had attained to perfect Wisdom, men
built the vihara in it.
Buddha wished to convert Kaundinya ^ and his four companions ; but
'
'The city surrounded by rivers;' the modern Benares, lat. 25° 23' N., Ion.
83° 5' E.
''
'The rishi,' says Eitel, 'is a man whose bodily frame has undergone a
certain transformation by dint of meditation and asceticism, so that he is, for an
indefinite period, exempt from decrepitude, age, and death. As this period is
believed to extend far beyond the usual duration of human life, such persons are
called, and popularly believed to be, immortals' Rishis are divided into various
classes; and rishi-ism is spoken of as a seventh path of transrotation, and rishis
are referred to as the seventh class of sentient beings. Taoism, as well as Buddhism,
has its Seen jin.
° For another legend about this park, and the identification with 'a fine wood'
sdll existing, see note in Beal's first version, p. 135.
''
A prince of Magadha and
a maternal uncle of Sakyamuni, who gave him
the name of Ajnata,
meaning automat; and hence he often appears as
Ajflata Kaundinya. He and his four friends had followed âkyamuni into the
Uruvilva desert, sympathising with him in the austerities he endured, and hoping
that they would issue in his Buddhaship. They were not aware that that issue
had come which may show us that all the accounts in the thirly-first chapter
;
COXVEJiSIOX OF KAUXDIXVA AXD OTHERS. 95
they, (being aware of his intention), said to one another, '

This Sramana
Gotama' for six years continued in the practice of painful austerities, eating
daily (only) a single hemp-seed, and one grain of rice, without attaining to
the Path (of Wisdom) ; how much less will he do so now that he has entered
(again) among men, and is giving the reins to (the indulgence of) his
body, and his thoughts What has he to do with the Path (of
his speech, !
Wisdom) ? To-day, when he comes to us, let us be on our guard not to

speak with him.' At the places where the five men all rose up, and
respectfully saluted (Buddha), when he came to them where, sixty paces ;
north from this, he sat with his face to the east, and first turned the
wheel of the Law, converting Kaundinya and the four others; where,
are merely descriptions, by means of external imagery, of what had taken place
internally. The kingdom of nirvana had come without obser\'ation. These
friends knew it not and they were offended by what they considered Sakyamuni's
;
failure, and the course he was now pursuing. See the account of their conversion
in M. B., p. 186.
* This is the only instance in Fa-hien's te.Kt where the Bodhisattva or Buddha
is called by the surname '
Gotama.' traveller uses Buddha
For the most part our
as a proper name, though it means The Enlightened.' He uses also the
properly '
combinations '
Sakya Buddha,' = The Buddha of the Sakya tribe,' and âkya-
'
'
muni,' = 'The $akya sage.' This last is the most common designation of the Buddha
in China, and to my mind best combines the characteristics of a descriptive and a
proper name. Among other Buddhistic peoples Gotama' and 'Gotama Buddha
'
are the more frequent designations. It is not easy to account for the rise of the
surname Gotama in the Sakya family, as Oldenberg acknowledges. He says that
'
the Sakyas, in accordance with the custom of Indian noble famihes, had borrowed
it from one of the ancient Vedic bard families.' Dr. Davids ( Buddhism,' p. 27)
says :
'
The family name was certainly Gautama,' adding in a note, ' It is a curious
fact that Gautama is still the family name of the Rajput chiefs of Nagara, the village
which has been identified with Kapilavastu.' Dr. Eitel says that '
Gautama was
the sacerdotal name of the Sakya family, which counted the ancient rishi Gautama
among its ancestors.' When we proceed, however, to endeavour to trace the con-
nexion of that Brahmanical rishi with the Sakya house, by means of 1323, 1468,
1469, and other historical works in Nanjio's Catalogue, we soon find that Indian
histories have no surer foundation than the shifting sand ; see E. H., on the name —
Sakj'a, pp. 108, 109. We must be content for the present simply to accept Gotama
as one of the surnames of the Buddha with whom we have to do.
96 THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEX.
twenty paces further to the north, he dehvered his prophecy concerning
Maitreya^; and where, at a distance of fifty paces to the south, the dragon
Elapattra^ asked him, 'When shall I get free from this naga body?' at —
all these places topes were reared, and are still existing. In (the park)
there are two monasteries, in both of which there are monks residing.
When you go north-west from the vihara of the Deer-wild park for
thirteen yojanas, there is a kingdom named Kausambi ^. Its vihara
is —
named Ghochiravana* a place where Buddha formerly resided. Now,
as of old, there is a company of monks there, most of whom are students
of the hinayana.
East from (this), when you have travelled eight yojanas, is the place
where Buddha converted the evil demon. There, and where he walked (in
'"
meditation) and sat at the place w^hich was his regular abode, there have
been topes erected. There is also a monastery, which may contain more
than a hundred monks.
CHAPTER XXXV.
DAKSHINA, AND THE PIGEON MONASTERY.
South from this 200 yojanas, there is a country named Dakshina*,
where there is a monastery (dedicated to) the bygone Kasyapa Buddha,
' See note 3, p. 25. It is there said that the prediction of Maitreya's succession
to the Buddhaship was made to him in the Tushita heaven. Was there a repetition of
it here in the Deer-park, or was a prediction now given concerning something else ?
^ Nothing seems to be known of this naga but what we read here.

' Identified by some with Kusia, near Kurrah (lat. 25° 41' N., Ion. 81° 27'E.) ; by
others with Kosam on the Jumna, thirty miles above Allahabad. See E. H., p. 55.
* Ghochira was the name of a Vaisya elder, or head, who presented a garden
and vihara to Buddha. Hardy (M.
356) quotes a statement from a Singhalese
B., p.
authority that Sak3âmuni resided here during the ninth year of his Buddhaship.
^ Dr. Davids thinks this may refer to the striking and beautiful story of the con-
version of the Yakkha Alavaka, as related in the Uragavagga, Alavakasutta,
pp. 29-31 (Sacred Books of the East, vol. x, part ii).
" Said to be the ancient name for the Deccan. As to the various marvels
in the chapter, it must be borne in mind that our author, as he tells us at the
end, only gives them from hearsay. See 'Buddhist Records of the Western
World,' vol. ii, pp. 214, 215, where the description, however, is very different.
THE PIGEON MONASTERY OF DAKSHINA. y7
and which has been hewn out from a large hill of rock. It consists in all
of five storeys ;
—
the lowest, having the form of an elephant, with 500
apartments in the rock the second, having the form of a lion, with
;
400 apartments the third, having the form of a horse, with 300 apart-
;
ments the fourth, having the form of an ox, with 200 apartments
; ;
and the fifth, having the form of a pigeon, with 100 apartments. At
the very top there is a spring, the water of which, always in front of
the apartments in the rock, goes round among the rooms, now circling,
now curving, till in this way it arrives at the lowest storey, having followed
the shape of the structure, and flows out there at the door. Everywhere
in the apartments of the monks, the rock has been pierced so as to form
windows for the admission of light, so that they are all bright, without
any being left in darkness. At the four comers of the (tiers of) apart-
ments, the rock has been hewTi so as to form steps for ascending to the
top (of each). The men of the present day, being of small size, and
going up step by step, manage to get to the top but in a former age they
;
did so at one step^. Because of this, the monastery is called Paravata,

that being the Indian name for a pigeon. There are always Arhats
residing in it.
The country about is (a tract of) uncultivated hillocks -, without in-

habitants. At a very long distance from the hill there are villages,
where the people all have bad and erroneous views, and do not know the
Sramanas of the Law of Buddha, Brahmanas, or (devotees of) any of the
other and different schools. The people of that country are constantly
seeing men on the wing, who come and enter this monastery. On one
occasion, when devotees of various countries came to perform their worship
at it, the people of those villages said to them, 'Why do you not fly?
;
The devotees whom we have seen hereabouts all fly and the strangers '
answered, on the spur of the moment, 'Our wings are not yet fully formed.'
The kingdom of Dakshina is out of the way, and perilous to traverse.
There are difficulties in connexion with the roads but those who know
;
' Compare the account of Buddha's great stride of fifteen yojanas in Ceylon,
as related in chapter xxxviii.

' See the same phrase in the Books of the Later Han dynasty, the twenty-
fourth Book of Biographies, p. 9 b.
how to manage such difficulties and wish to proceed should bring with
them money and various articles, and give them to the king. He will
then send men to escort them. These will (at different stages) pass
them over to others, who will show them the shortest routes. Fa-hien,
however, was after all unable to go there but having received the ;
(above) accounts from men of the country, he has narrated them.
CHAPTER XXXVI.
IN PATNA. FA-HIEN'S LABOURS IN TRANSCRIPTION OF MANU-
SCRIPTS, AND INDIAN STUDIES FOR THREE YEARS.
From Varanasi (the travellers) went back east to Pataliputtra. Fa-

hien's original object had been to search for (copies of) the Vinaya. In
the various kingdoms of North India, however, he had found one master
transmitting orally (the rules) to another, but no written copies which he
could transcribe. He had therefore travelled far and come on to Central
India. Here, in the mahayana monastery ^, he found a copy of the Vinaya,
containing the Mahasahghika" rules, those which were observed in —
the first Great Council, while Buddha was still in the world. The
original copy was handed down in the Jetavana vihara. As to the other
eighteen schools ^, each one has the views and decisions of its own masters.
Mentioned before in chapter xxvii.

'
Mahasahghikah simply means the Great Assembly,' that

' '
is, of monks.
When was this first assembly in the time of âkyamuni held? It does not
appear that the rules observed at it were written down at the time. The document
found by Fa-hien would be a record of those rules ; or rather a copy of that
record. We must suppose that the original record had disappeared from the
Jetavana %ihara, or Fa-hien would probably have spoken of it when he was
there, and copied it, if he had been allowed to do so.
' The eighteen pu (§|5). Four times in this chapter the character called
pii occurs, and in the first and two last instances it can only have the meaning,
often belonging to it, of ' copy.' The second instance, however, is diflerent. How
should there be eighteen copies, all different from the original, and from one
another, in minor matters ? We are compelled to translate — ' the eighteen schools,'
MSS. COPIED. TA 0-CHING REMAINS AT PA TNA .
99
Those agree (with this) in the general meaning, but they have small and
trivial differences, as when one opens and another shuts ^. This copy (of
the rules), however, is the most complete, with the fullest explanations ^.
He got a transcript of the rules in six or seven thousand

further
gathas^, being the sarvastivadah* rules, those which are observed by —
the communities of monks in the land of Ts'in which also have all been ;
handed down orally from master to master without being committed to

writing. In the community here, moreover, he got the Samyuktabhi-
dharma-hridaya-(sastra)', containing about six or seven thousand
gathas he also got a Sutra of 2500 gathas one chapter of the Parin ir-
; ;
vana-vaipulya Sutra*, of about 5000 gathas; and the Mahasan-

ghikah Abhidharma.
In consequence (of this success in his quest) Fa-hien stayed here for
three years, learning Sanskrit books and the Sanskrit speech, and writing
out the Vinaya rules. When Tô-ching arrived in the Central Kingdom,
and saw the rules observed by the Sramanas, and the dignified demeanour
in their societies which he remarked under all occurring circumstances,
he sadly called to mind in what a mutilated and imperfect condition the
rules were among the monkish communities in the land of Ts'in, and
made the following aspiration :
— ' From this time forth till I come to the
an expression well knoM-n in all Buddhist writings. See Rhys Davids' Manual,
p. 218, and the authorities there quoted.
' This is equivalent to the 'binding' and 'loosing,' 'opening' and 'shutting,'
which found their way into the New Testament, and the Christian Church, from
the schools of the Jewish Rabbins.
" It was afterwards translated by Fa-hien into Chinese. See Nanjio's Catalogue
of the Chinese Tripitaka, columns 400 and 401, and Nos. 11 19 and 11 50,
columns 247 and 253.
' A gatha is a stanza, generally consisting, it has seemed to me, of a few,
commonly of two, lines somewhat metrically arranged but I do not know ; that
its length is strictly defined.

* 'A branch,' says Eitel, '
of the great vaibhashika school, asserting the reality
of all visible phenomena, and claiming the authority of Rahula.'
^ See Nanjio's Catalogue, No. 1287. He does not mention it in his account
of Fa-hien, who, he says, translated the Sainyukta-pitaka Sfltra.
" Probably Nanjio's Catalogue, No. 120 ; at any rate, connected with it.
o %
lOO THE TEA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
state of Buddha, let me
not be born in a frontier land ^.' He remained
accordingly and did not return (to the land of Han). Fa-hien,
(in India),
however, whose original purpose had been to secure the introduction of

the complete Vinaya rules into the land of Han, returned there alone.
CHAPTER XXXVn.
TO CHAMPA AND TAMALIPTI. STAY AND LABOURS THERE FOR
THREE YEARS. TAKES SHIP TO SINGHALA, OR CEYLON.
Following the course of the Ganges, and descending eastwards for
eighteen yojanas, he found on the southern bank the great kingdom
of Champa^, with topes reared at the places where Buddha walked in
meditation by his vihara, and where he and the three Buddhas, his
predecessors, sat. There were monks residing at them all. Continuing
his journey east for nearly fifty yojanas, he came to the country of
Tamalipti ^ (the capital of which is) a seaport. In the country there
are twenty-two monasteries, at all of which there are monks residing.
The Law of Buddha is also flourishing in it. Here Fa-hien stayed two
years, writing out his Sutras *, and drawing pictures of images.
After this he embarked in a large merchant-vessel, and went floating
over the sea to the south-west. It was the beginning of winter, and the
wind was favourable ; and, after fourteen days, sailing day and night, they
came to the country of Singhala ®. The people said that it was distant
(from Tamalipti) about 700 yojanas.
' This then would be the consummation of the Sramana's being, — to get to
be Buddha, the Buddha of his time in his Kalpa; and Tdo-ching thought that
he could attain to consummation by a succession of births and was likely
this ;
to attain to it sooner by living only in India. If all this was not in his mind, he
yet felt that each of his successive lives would be happier, if lived in India.
^ Probably the modern Champanagur, three miles west of Baglipoor, lat. 25° 14'
N., Ion. 56° 55' E.
' Then the principal emporium for the trade with Ceylon and China ; the modern
Tam-look, lat. 22° 17' N., Ion. 88' 2' E. ; near the mouth of the Hoogly.
* Perhaps Ching (^^ is used here for any portions of the Tripitaka which
he had obtained.
" 'The Kingdom of the Lion,' Ceylon. Singhala was the name of a
SINGHALA, OR CEYLON. loi
The kingdom is on a large island, extending from east to west fifty
yojanas, and from north to south thirty. Left and right from it there
are as many as loo small islands, distant from one another ten, twenty,
or even 200 le ; but all subject to the large island. Most of them produce
pearls and precious stones of various kinds one which produces ; there is
the pure and brilliant pearl ^, —an

would form a square of
island which
about ten le. The king employs men to watch and protect it, and
requires three out of every ten such pearls, which the collectors find.
CHAPTER XXXVIII.
AT CEYLON. RISE OF THE KINGDOM. FEATS OF BUDDHA. TOPES
AND MONASTERIES. STATUE OF BUDDHA IN JADE. BO TREE.
FESTIVAL OF BUDDHA'S TOOTH.
The human inhabitants-, but was occupied

country originally had no
only by and nagas, with which merchants of various countries
spirits
carried on a trade. When the trafficking was taking place, the spirits
did not show themselves. They simply set forth their precious commo-
dities, with labels of the price attached to them while the merchants ;
made their purchases according to the price and took the things away. ;
Through the coming and going of the merchants (in this way), when
they went away, the people of (their) various countries heard how
pleasant the land was, and flocked to it in numbers till it became a
merchant adventurer from India, to whom the founding of the kingdom was
ascribed. His father was named Singha, ' the Lion,' which became thename of the
country; — Singhala, or Singha-Kingdom, 'the Country of the Lion.'
' Called the mani pearl or bead. Mani is explained as meaning 'free from
stain,' '
bright and growing purer.' It is a symbol of Buddha and of his Law.
The most %'aluable rosaries are made of manis.
' It is desirable to translate A ^, for which 'inhabitants' or 'people' is
elsewhere sufficient, here by '

human inhabitants.' According to other accounts
Singhala was originally occupied by Rakshasas or Rakshas, 'demons who
devour men,' and 'beings to be monstrous cannibals or anthropophagi,
feared,'
the terror of the shipwrecked mariner. Our author's spirits ( >^ ^^) were ' '
of a gentler type. His dragons or nagas have come before us again and again.
I02 THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
great nation. The (climate) is temperate and attractive, without any
difference of summer and winter. The vegetation is always luxuriant.
Cultivation proceeds whenever men think fit there are no fixed seasons
:
for it.
When Buddha came ^, wshing to transform the wicked

to this country
nagas, by power he planted one foot at the north of the
his supernatural
royal city, and the other on the top of a mountain ^, the two being fifteen
yojanas apart. Over the footprint at the north of the city the king built
a large tope, 400 cubits high, grandly adorned with gold and silver, and
finished with a combination of all the precious substances. By the side
of the tope he further built a monastery, called the Abhayagiri ^ where
there are (now) five thousand monks. There is in it a hall of Buddha,
adorned with carved and inlaid work of gold and silver, and rich in the
seven precious substances, in which there is an image (of Buddha) in
green jade, more than twenty cubits in height, glittering all over with those
substances, and having an appearance of solemn dignity which words
cannot express. In the palm of the right hand there is a priceless pearl.
Several years had now elapsed since Fa-hien left the land of Han ; the
'That Sakyamuni ever visited Ceylon is to me more than doubtful. Hardy,

in M, B., pp. 207-213, has brought together the legends of three visits, in the first, —
fifth, and eighth years of his Buddhaship. It is plain, however, from Fa-hien's
narrative, that in the beginning of our fifth century, Buddhism prevailed throughout
the island. Davids in the last chapter of his '
Buddhism '
ascribes its introduction
to one of Asoka's missions, after the Council of Patna, under his son Mahinda,
when Tissa, 'the delight of the gods,'
was king (b. c. 250-230).
'^
This would be what known
as 'Adam's peak,' having, according to
is
Hardy (pp. 211, 212, notes), the three names of Selesumano, Samastaktjta, and
Samanila. There is an indentation on the top of it,' a superficial hollow, 5 feet
'
3I inches long, and about 2\ feet wide. The Hindus regard it as the footprint of
Siva ; Mohammedans, as that of Adam and
the ; the Buddhists, as in the text,
as having been made by Buddha.
' Meaning The Fearless Hill.'
'
There is still the Abhayagiri tope, the
highest in Ceylon, according to Davids, 250 feet in height, and built about b. c.
90, by Watta Gamini, in whose reign, about 160 years after the Council of Patna,
and 330 years after the death of Sakyamuni, the Tripitaka was first reduced to
writing in Ceylon; — 'Buddhism,' p. 234.
THE FAMOUS BO TREE. 103
men with whom he had been in intercourse had all been of regions strange
to him ; his eyes had not rested on an old and familiar hill or river, plant
or tree : his fellow-travellers, moreover, had been separated from him,
some by death, and others flowing off in different directions no face or ;
shadow was now with him but his own, and a constant sadness was in
his heart. Suddenly (one day), when by the side of this image of jade,
he saw a merchant presenting as his offering a fan of white silk^; and
the tears of sorrow involuntarily filled his eyes and fell down.
A
former king of the country had sent to Central India and got a slip
of the patra tree-, which he planted by the side of the hall of Buddha,
where a tree grew up to the height of about 200 cubits. As it bent
on one side towards the south-east, the king, fearing it would fall,
propped it with a post eight or nine spans round. The tree began to
grow at the very heart of the prop, where it met (the trunk) (a shoot) ;
pierced through the post, and went down to the ground, where it entered
and formed roots, that rose (to the surface) and were about four spans
round. Although the post was split in the middle, the outer portions kept
'
We naturally suppose that the merchant-offerer was a Chinese, as indeed the
Chinese texts say, and the fan such as Fa-hien had seen and used in his native land.
-
This should be the pippala, or bodhidruma, generally spoken of, in con-
nexion with Buddha, as the Bo tree, under which he attained to the Buddhaship.
It is strange our author should have confounded them as he seems to do. In
what we are told of the tree here, we have, no doubt, his account of the planting,
growth, and preservation of the famous Bo tree, which still exists in Ceylon. It
has been stated in a previous note that Asoka's son, IMahinda, went as the
apostle of Buddhism to Ceylon. By-and-by he sent for his sister SanghamittS,
who had entered the order at the same time as himself, and whose help was
needed, some of the king's female relations having signified their wish to become
nuns. On leaving India, she took with her a branch of the sacred Bo tree at
Buddha Gaya, under which Sakyamuni had become Buddha. Of how the tree
has grown and still lives we have an account in Davids' Buddhism.' He quotes
'
the words of Sir Emerson Tennent, that it is the oldest historical tree in the
'
;
world but this must be denied if it be true, as Eitel says, that the tree at Buddha
'
Gaya, from which the slip that grew to be this tree was taken more than 2000
years ago, is itself still living in its place. We might conclude that Fa-hien, when
in Ceylon, heard neither of Mahinda nor Sanghamitta.
hold (of the shoot), and people did not remove them. Beneath the tree
there has been built a vihara, in which there an image (of Buddha) is
seated, which the monks and commonalty reverence and look up to

without ever becoming wearied. In the city there has been reared also
the vihara of Buddha's tooth, on which, as well as on the other, the
seven precious substances have been employed.
The king practises the Brahmanical purifications, and the sincerity of
the faith and reverence of the population inside the city are also great.
Since the establishment of government in the kingdom there has been no
famine or scarcity, no revolution or disorder. In the treasuries of the
monkish communities there are many precious stones, and the priceless
man i s . One of the kings (once) entered one of those treasuries, and when
he looked all round and saw the priceless pearls, his covetous greed was
excited, and he wished to take them to himself by force. In three days,
however, he came to himself, and immediately went and bowed his head to
the ground in the midst of the monks, to show his repentance of the evil
thought. As
a sequel to this, he informed the monks (of what had been
in his mind), and desired them to make a regulation that from that day
forth the king should not be allowed to enter the treasury and see (what
it contained), and that no bhikshu should enter it till after he had been
in orders for a period of full forty years *.
In the city there are many Vaisya

elders and Sabaean - merchants,
whose houses are stately and beautiful. The lanes and passages are
kept in good order. At the heads of the four principal streets there
have been built preaching halls, where, on the eighth, fourteenth, and
fifteenth days of the month, they spread carpets, and set forth a pulpit,
while the monks and commonalty from all quarters come together to hear
the Law. The people say that in the kingdom there may be altogether
sixty thousand monks, who get their food from their common stores.
' Compare what is made at monasteries

said in chap, xvi, about the inquiries
as to the standing of visitors in the monkhood, and duration of their ministry. •
° The phonetic values of the two Chinese characters here are in Sanskrit
si; and va, bo or bha. 'Sabaean' is Mr. Beal's reading of them, probably
correct. I suppose the merchants were Arabs, forerunners of the so-called
Moormen, who still form so important a part of the mercantile community in
Ceylon.
FESTIVAL OF BUDDHA'S TOOTH. 105
The king, besides, prepares elsewhere in the city a common supply of

food for five or six thousand more. When any want, they take their
great bowls, and go (to the place of distribution), and take as much as the
vessels will hold, all returning with them full.
The Buddha is always brought forth in the middle of the

tooth of
third Ten days beforehand the king grandly caparisons a large
month.
elephant, on which he mounts a man who can speak distinctly, and is
dressed in royal robes, to beat a large drum, and make the following pro-
clamation :
—
'The Bodhisattva, during three Asahkhyeya-kalpas *,
manifested his activity, and did not spare his own life. He gave up king-
dom, city, wife, and son he plucked out his eyes and gave them to
;
life of a dove^; he
another-; he cut off a piece of his flesh to ransom the
cut off his head and gave he gave his body to feed a
it as an alms ^ ;
starving tigress ^ he grudged not his marrow and brains. In many

;
such ways as these did he undergo pain for the sake of all living. And
so it was, that, having become Buddha, he continued in the world for
forty-five years, preaching hisLaw, teaching and transforming, so that
those who had no and the unconverted were converted.
rest found rest,
When his connexion with the living was completed*, he attained to

pari-nirvana (and died). Since that event, for 1497 years, the light of
the world has gone out ^, and all living beings have had long-continued
sadness. Behold! ten days after this, Buddha's tooth will be brought
forth, and taken to the Abhayagiri-vihara. Let all and each, whether
' A Kalpa, we have seen, denotes a great period of time; a period during
which a physical universe is formed and destroyed. Asahkhyeya denotes
the highest sum for which a conventional term exists ;
— according to Chinese
calculations equal to one followed by seventeen ciphers ; according to Thibetan
and Singhalese, equal to one followed by ninety-seven ciphers. Every ]Maha-
kalpa consists of four Asahkhyeya-kalpas. Eitel, p. 15.
^ See chapter ix.
' See chapter xi.
* He had been born in the Sakya house, to do for the world what the character
of all his past births required, and he had done it.
^ They could no more see him, the World-honoured one. Compare the
Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, Buddhist Suttas, pp. 89, 121, and note
on p. 89.
P
io6 THE TRAVELS OF FA-HIEX.
monks or laics, who wish to amass merit for themselves, make the
roads smooth and in good condition, grandly adorn the lanes and
by-ways, and provide abundant store of flowers and incense to be used
as offerings to it.'
When this proclamation is over, the king exhibits, so as to line both

sides of the road, the five hundred different bodily forms in which the
Bodhisattva has in the course of his history appeared : — here as Sudana^,
there as Sama - ; now as the king of elephants ^, and then as a stag
or a horse ^. All these figures are brightly coloured and grandly
executed, looking as if they were alive. After this the tooth of Buddha
is brought forth, and is carried along in the middle of the road. Every-
where on the way offerings are presented to and thus it arrives at the
it,
hall of Buddha in the Abhayagiri-vihara. There monks and laics are
Sudana or Sudatta was the name of the Bodhisattva in the birth which
'
preceded his appearance as Sakyamuni or Gotama, when he became the
Supreme Buddha. This period is known as the Vessantara Jataka, of which

Hardy, M. 1 16-124, gives
B., pp. a long account; see also 'Buddhist Birth
Stories,' the Nidana Katha, p. 158. In it, as Sudana, he fulfilled 'the Perfections,'
his distinguishing attribute being entire self-renunciation and alms-giving, so that
in the Nidana Katha he is made
to say (' Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 158) :
' This earth, unconscious though she be, and ignorant of joy or grief,
Even she by my free-giving's mighty power was shaken seven times.'
Then, when he passed away, he appeared in the Tushita heaven, to enter in
due time the womb of Maha-maya, and be born as Sakyamuni.
^ I take the name Sama from Beal's rewsed version. He says in a note
that the Sama Jataka, as well as the Vessantara, is represented in the Sanchi
sculptures. But what the Sama Jataka was I do not yet know. But adopting
this name, the two Chinese characters in the text should be translated '
the change
;
into Sama.' Rdmusat gives for them, '
la transformation en eclair ' Beal, in his
first version, 'his appearance as a bright flash of light;' Giles, 'as a flash of
lightning;' my own first version was 'as the changing flashes of lightning.'
Julien's M^thode does not give the phonetic value in Sanskrit of IjJ^^.
^ In an analysis of the number of times and the difterent forms in which
Sakyamuni had appeared in his Jataka births, given by Hardy (I\I. B., p. 100),
it is said that he had appeared six times as an elephant ten times as a deer ;
and four times as a horse.

CREMATION OF AN ARHAT. 107
collected in crowds. They burn and perform all the

incense, light lamps,
prescribed services, day and night without ceasing, till ninety days have
been completed, when (the tooth) is returned to the vihara within the
city. On fast-days the door of that vihara is opened, and the forms of
ceremonial reverence are observed according to the rules.
Forty le to the east of the Abhayagiri-vihara there is a hill, with a
vihara on it, called the Chaitya^ where there may be 2000 monks.
Among them there is a Sramana of great virtue, named Dharma-gupta^,
honoured and looked up to by all the kingdom. He has lived for more
than forty years in an apartment of stone, constantly showing such gentle-
ness of heart, that he has brought snakes and rats to stop together in the
same room, without doing one another any harm.
CHAPTER XXXIX.
CREMATION OF AN ARHAT. SERMON OF A DEVOTEE.
South of the city seven le there is a vihara, called the Maha-vihara,
where 3000 monks reside. There had been among them a Sramana, of such
lofty virtue, and so holy and pure in his observance of the disciplinary
rules, that the people all surmised that he was an Arhat. When he
drew near his end, the king came to examine into the point and having ;
assembled the monks according to rule, asked whether the bhikshu had
attained to the full degree of Wisdom ^. They answered in the affirma-
tive, saying that he was an Arhat. The king accordingly, when he died,
buried him after the fashion of an Arhat, as the regular rules prescribed.
' Chaitya is a general term designating all places and objects of religious wor-
ship which have a reference to ancient Buddhas, and including therefore Stflpas
and temples as well as sacred relics, pictures, statues, &c. It is defined as '
a
fane,' 'a place for worship and presenting offerings.' Eitel, p. 141. The hill
referred to is the sacred hill of Mihintale, about eight miles due east of the
Bo tree; —Davids' Buddhism, pp. 230, 231.
^ Eitel says (p. 31): 'A famous ascetic, the founder of a school, which
flourished in Ceylon, a.d. 400.' But Fa-hien gives no intimadon of Dharma-
gupta's founding a school.
' Possibly, '
and asked the bhikshu,' &c. I prefer the other way of construing,
however.
P2
io8 THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
Four or five le east from the vihara there was reared a great pile of fire-
wood, which might be more than thirty cubits square, and the same in
height. Near the top were laid sandal, aloe, and other kinds of
fragrant wood.
On the four sides (of the pile) they made steps by which to ascend it.
With clean white hair-cloth, almost like silk, they wrapped (the body)
round and round ^ They made a large carriage-frame, in form like our
funeral car, but without the dragons and fishes -.
At the time of the cremation, the king and the people, in multitudes
from together, and presented offerings of flowers
all quarters, collected
and While they were following the car to the burial-ground ^,

incense.
the king himself presented flowers and incense. When this was finished,
the car was lifted on the pile, all over which oil of sweet basil was
poured, and then a light was applied. While the fire was blazing, every
one, with a reverent heart, pulled off his upper garment, and threw it,
with his feather-fan and umbrella, from a distance into the midst of the
flames, to assist the burning. When the cremation was over, they
collected and preserved the bones, and proceeded to erect a tope. Fa-
hien had not arrived in time (to see the distinguished Shaman) alive,
and only saw his burial.
At that time the king*, who was a sincere believer in the Law of Buddha
and wished to build a new vihara for the monks, first convoked a great
^ It seems strange that this should have been understood as a wrapping of the
immense pyre with the cloth. There is nothing in the text to necessitate such a
version, but the contrar)'. Compare Buddhist '
Suttas,' pp. 92, 93.
^ See the description of a funeral car and its decorations in the Sacred
Books of the East, vol. xs\-iii, the Lt K\, Book XIX. Fa-hien's
]{:{^ ^,
'
in this (country),' which I have expressed by '
our,' shows that whatever notes
of this cremation he had taken at the time, the account in the te.\t was
composed after his return to China, and when he had the usages there in
his mind and perhaps before his eyes. This disposes of all difficulty
occasioned by the '

dragons ' and '
fishes.' The IS at the end is merely the
concluding particle.
' The pyre served the purpose of a burial-ground or grave, and hence our
author writes of it as such.
* This king must have been Maha-nana (a. d. 410-432). In the time of his
SERMON ON THE ALMS-BOWL OF BUDDHA. 109
assembly. After giving the monks a meal of

rice, and presenting his
ofterings (on the occasion), he selected a pair of first-rate oxen, the

horns of M'hich were grandly decorated with gold, silver, and the
precious substances. A
golden plough had been provided, and the king
himself turned up a furrow on the four sides of the ground within which
the building was to be. He then endowed the community of the monks
with the population, fields, and houses, writing the grant on plates of
metal, (to the effect) that from that time onwards, from generation to
generation, no one should venture to annul or alter it.
In this country Fa-hien heard an Indian devotee, who was reciting

a Sutra from the pulpit, say:
— 'Buddha's alms-bowl was at first in Vaisali,
and now it is in Gandhara ^. After so many hundred years ' (he gave,
when Fa-hien heard him, the exact number of years, but he has for-
gotten it), 'it will go to Western Tukhara^; after so many hundred
years, to Khoten ; after so many hundred years, to Kharachar ^ after ;
so many hundred years, to the land of Han ; after so many hundred

years, it will come to Sinhala and ; after so many hundred years, it
will return to Central India. After that, it will ascend to the Tushita
heaven ; and when the Bodhisattva Maitreya sees it, he will say with a
sigh, " The alms-bowl of Sakyamuni Buddha is come;" and with all the
devas he will present to it flowers and incense for seven days. When
these have expired, it will return to Jambudvipa, where it will be received
by the king of the seanagas, and taken into his naga palace. When
Maitreya shall be about to attain to perfect Wisdom (and become
Buddha), it vAW again separate into four bowls *, which will return to the
top of mount Anna *, whence they came. After Maitreya has become
predecessor, Upatissa (a. d. 368-410), the pitakas were first translated into
Singhalese. Under RIaha-nana, Buddhaghosha wrote his commentaries. Both
were great builders of viharas. See the Mahdvansa, pp. 247, foil.
'
See chapter xii. Fa-hien had seen it at Purushapura, which Eitel says was
'
the ancient capital of Gandhara.'
° Western Tukhara (^ '^ '^^ same probably as the Tukhara (|x)

^X)
of chapter xii, a king of which is there described as trying to carry off the
bowl from Purushapura.
' North of the Bosteng lake at the foot of the Thien-shan range (E. H., p. 56).
*
See note 3, p. 35. Instead of 'Anna 'the Chinese recensions have Vina;
no THE TEA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
Buddha, the four deva kings will again think of the Buddha (with their
bowls as they did in the case of the previous Buddha). The thousand
Buddhas of this Bhadra-kalpa, indeed, will all use the same alms-bowl
and when the bowl has disappeared, the Law of Buddha will go on
gradually to be extinguished. After that extinction has taken place,
the life of man will be shortened, till it is only a period of five years.
During this period of a five years' life, rice, butter, and oil will all
vanish away, and men will become exceedingly wicked. The grass and
trees which they lay hold of will change into swords and clubs, with
which they will hurt, cut, and kill one another. Those among them on
whom there is blessing will withdraw from society among the hills ;
and when the wicked have exterminated one another, they will again
come forth, and say among themselves, " The men of former times
enjoyed a very great longevity; but through becoming exceedingly
wicked, and doing all lawless things, the length of our life has been
shortened and reduced even to five years. Let us now unite together in
the practice of what is good, cherishing a gentle and sympathising heart,
and carefully cultivating good faith and righteousness. When each one
in this way practises that faith and righteousness, life will go on to
double its length till it reaches 80,000 years. When Maitreya appears
in the world, and begins to turn the wheel of Law, he will in the first
his
place save those among the disciples of the Law left by the Sakya who
have quitted their families, and those who have accepted the three
Refuges, undertaken the five Prohibitions and the eight Abstinences, and
given offerings to the three Precious Ones ; secondly and thirdly, he \vill
save those between whom and conversion there is a connexion trans-

mitted from the past \"
'
(Such was the discourse), and Fa-hien ^\^shed to write it down

as a portion of doctrine ; but the man said, '
This is taken from no
Sutra, it is only the utterance of my own mind.'
but Vina or VTnataka, and Ana for Sudarsana are names of one or other
of the concentric circles of rocks surrounding mount Meru, the fabled home
of the deva guardians of the bowl.
' That is, those whose Karma in the past should be rewarded by such
conversion in the present.
PASSAGE TO CHINA BY SEA.
CHAPTER XL.
AFTER TWO YEARS TAKES SHIP FOR CHINA. DISASTROUS PASSAGE

TO JAVA AND THENCE TO CHINA ARRIVES AT SHAN-TUNG
; ; ;
AND GOES TO NANKING. CONCLUSION OR L'ENVOI BY ANOTHER

WRITER.
Fa-hien abode in this country two years ; and, in addition (to his
copy of the Vinaya-
acquisitions in Patna), succeeded in getting a
pitaka Mahisasakah (school)'; the Dirghagama and
of the
Sainyuktagama- (Sutras); and also the Samyukta-safichaya-
pitaka^; — all being works unknown in the land of Han. Having
obtained these Sanskrit works, he took passage in a large merchantman,
on board of which there were more than 200 men, and to which was
attached by a rope a smaller vessel, as a provision against damage
or injury to the large one from the perils of the navigation. With
a favourable wind, they proceeded eastwards for three days, and then
they encountered a great wind. The vessel sprang aleak and the water
came in. The merchants wished to go to the smaller vessel; but the men
on board it, fearing that too many would come, cut the connecting rope.
The merchants were greatly alarmed, feeling their risk of instant death.
Afraid that the vessel would fill, they took their bulky goods and threw
' No. 1 1 22 in Nanjio's Catalogue, translated into Chinese by Buddhajiva and

a Chinese Sramana about a.d. 425. Mahisasakah means '
the school of the trans-
formed earth,' or '
the sphere within which the Law of Buddha is influential.'
The school is one of the subdivisions of the Sarvastivadah.

^ Nanjio's 545 and 504. The Agamas are Sutras of the hinayana,
divided, according to Eitel, pp. 4, 5, into four classes, the first or Dirghaga-
mas (long Agamas) being treatises on right conduct, while the third class
contains the Sarnyuktagamas (mixed Agamas).
^ Meaning 'Miscellaneous Collections;' a sort of fourth Pitaka. See Nanjio's
fourth division of the Canon, containing Indian and Chinese miscellaneous
works. But Dr. Davids says that no work of this name is known either in
Sanskrit or Pali literature.
112 THE TRAVELS OF FA-HI EN.
them into the water. and washing-
Fa-hien also took his pitcher
*
basin, with some other

and cast them into the sea but fearing
articles, ;
that the merchants would cast overboard his books and images, he could
only think with all his heart of Kwan-she-yin ", and commit his life to
(the protection of) the church of the land of Han ^, (saying in effect),
'
I have travelled far in search of our Law. Let me, by your dread and
supernatural (power), return from my wanderings, and reach my resting-
place !
way the tempest* continued day and night, till on the

In this
thirteenth day the ship was carried to the side of an island, where,
on the ebbing of the tide, the place of the leak was discovered, and
it was stopped, on which the voyage was resumed. On the sea
(hereabouts) there are many pirates, to meet with whom is speedy
death. The great ocean spreads out, a boundless expanse. There
is no knowing east or west only by observing the sun, moon, and
;
stars was it possible to go forward. If the weather were dark and

rainy, (the ship) went as she was carried by the wind, without any
definite course. In the darkness of the night, only the great waves
were to be seen, breaking on one another, and emitting a brightness
like that of fire, with huge turtles and other monsters of the deep
(all about). The merchants were full of terror, not knowing where they
were going. The sea was deep and bottomless, and there was no place
where they could drop anchor and stop. But when the sky became
clear, they could tell east and west, and (the ship) again went forward in
' We have in the text a phonetisation of the Sanskrit Kundika, which is
explained in Eitel by the two characters that follow, as=' washing basin,' but two
things evidently are intended.
At his
' novitiate Fa-hien had sought the refuge of the three Precious
'
Ones (the ' three Refuges [^ ^1 of last chapter), of which the congregation
or body of the monks was one ; and here his thoughts turn naturally to the
branch of it in China. His words in his heart were not exactly words of prayer,
but^very nearly so.
* In the text ^ ^, ta-fung, 'the great wind,' = the typhoon.
THEY GET TO LAND. 113
the right direction. If she had come on any hidden rock, there would
have been no way of escape.
After proceeding in this way for rather more than ninety days, they
arrived at a country called Java-dvipa, where various forms of error and
Brahmanism are flourishing, while Buddhism in it is not worth speaking
of. After staying there for five months, (Fa-hien) again embarked in
another large merchantman, which also had on board more than 200
men. They carried provisions for fifty days, and commenced the
voyage on the sixteenth day of the fourth month.
Fa-hien kept his retreat on board the ship. They took a course
to the north-east, intending to fetch Kwang-chow. After more than a
month, when the night-drum had sounded the second watch, they
encountered a black wind and tempestuous rain, which threw the
merchants and passengers into consternation. Fa-hien again with
all and the monkish
his heart directed his thoughts to Kwan-she-j-in
communities of the land of Han and, through their dread and
;
mysterious protection, was preser\'ed to day-break. After day-break,

the Brahmans deliberated together and said, It is having this Sramana
'
on board which has occasioned our misfortune and brought us this

great and bitter suffering. Let us land the bhikshu and place him
on some island-shore. We must not for the sake of one man allow
ourselves to be exposed to such imminent peril.' A
patron of Fa-hien,
however, said to them, If you land the bhikshu, you must at the
'
same time land me and if you do not, then you must kill me. If you
;
land this Sramana, when I get to the land of Han, I will go to the king,
and inform against you. The king also reveres and believes the Law
of Buddha, and honours the bhikshus.' The merchants hereupon were
perplexed, and did not dare immediately to land (Fa-hien).
At this time the sky continued very dark and gloomy, and the
sailing-masters looked at one another and made mistakes. More than
seventy days passed (from their leaving Java), and the provisions and
water were nearly exhausted. They used the salt-water of the sea for
man getting two
cooking, and carefully divided the (fresh) water, each
pints. Soon the whole was nearly gone, and the merchants took
counsel and said, At the ordinary rate of sailing we ought to have
'
reached Kwang-chow. and now the time is passed by many days ;
q
114 THE TRAVELS OF FA- HIEN.
must we not have held a wrong course ?

Immediately they directed the
'
and after sailing day and night

ship to the north-west, looking out for land ;
for twelve days, they reached the shore on the south of mount Lao ^,
on the borders of the prefecture of Ch'ang-kwang ', and immediately got
good water and vegetables. They had passed through many perils and
hardships, and had been in a state of anxious apprehension for many
days together; and now suddenly arriving at this shore, and seeing
those (well-known) vegetables, the lei and kwoh-, they knew indeed
that it was the land of Han. Not seeing, however, any inhabitants
nor any traces of them, they did not know whereabouts they were.
Some said that they had not yet got to Kwang-chow, and others that
they had passed it. Unable to come to a definite conclusion, (some of
them) got into a small boat and entered a creek, to look for some one
of whom they might ask what the place was. They found two hunters,
whom they brought back with them, and then called on Fa-hien to act
as interpreter and question them. Fa-hien first spoke assuringly to
them, and then slowly and distinctly asked them, 'Who are you?'
They replied, '
We are disciples of Buddha ? He then ' asked, '
What
are you looking for among these hills?' They began to lie^, and said,
'
They had got to the south of the Shan-tung promontory, and the foot of mount
Lao, which still rises under the same name on the extreme south of the peninsula,
east from Keao Chow, and having the district of Tseih-mih on the east of it.
All the country there is included in the present Phing-too Chow of the department
Lae-chow. The name Phing-too dates from the Han dynasty, but under the
dynasty of the After Ch'e (^^ ^^), (a.d. 479-501), it was changed into Ch'ang-
kwang. Fa-hienmay have lived, and composed the narrative of his travels,
after the change of name was adopted. See the Topographical Tables of the
different Dynasties
^ What
(^ |^
these vegetables
'^^ ^ ^),
exactly were
published in 181
it is difficult to
5.
say ; and there are

different readings of the characters for them. Williams' Dictionary, under kwoh,
brings the two names together in a phrase, but the rendering of it is simply '
a
soup of simples.' For two or three columns here, however, the text appears to
me confused and imperfect.

" I suppose these men were really hunters ; and, when brought before Fii-
hien, because he was a Sramana, they thought they would please him by saying
END OF THE TRAVELS. 115
'
To-morrow is the fifteenth day of the seventh month. We wanted to
get some peaches to present ' to Buddha.' He asked further, '
What
country is this?' They replied, 'This is the border of the prefecture
of Ch'ang-kwang, a part of Ts'ing-chow under the (ruhng) House of
Tsin.' When they heard this, the merchants were glad, immediately
asked for (a portion of) their money and goods, and sent men to Ch'ang-
kwang city.
The prefect Le E was a reverent believer in the Law of Buddha.

When he heard that a Sramana had arrived in a ship across the sea,
bringing with him books and images, he immediately came to the sea-
shore with an escort to meet (the traveller), and receive the books and
images, and took them back with him to the seat of his government.
On this the merchants w-ent back in the direction of Yang-chow ^ ;
(but)
when (Fa-hien) arrived at Ts'ing-chow, (the prefect there) ^ begged him
(to remain with him) for a winter and a summer. After the summer
retreat was ended, Fa-hien, having been separated for a long time from
his (fellow--)masters, wished- tohurry to Ch'ang-gan but as the business ;
which he had in hand was important, he went south to the Capital * and ;
at an interview with the masters (there) exhibited the Sutras and the
collection of the V n a y a (which he had procured).
i
After Fa-hien set out from Ch'ang-gan, it took him six years to reach
they were disciples of Buddha. But what had disciples of Buddha to do with
hunting and taking life ? They were caught in their own trap, and said they
were looking for peaches.
' The Chinese character here has occurred twice before, but in a different
meaning and connexion. Rdmusat, Beal, and Giles take it as equivalent to
'to sacrifice.' But his followers do not 'sacrifice' to Buddha. That is a
priestly term, and should not be employed of anything done at Buddhistic
services.
' Probably the present department of Yang-chow in Keang-soo ; but as I have
said in a previous note, the narrative does not go on so clearly as it generally
does.
' Was, or could, this prefect be Le E?
' Probably not Ch'ang-gan, but Nan-king, which was the capital of the Eastern
Tsin dynasty under another name.
q 2
ii6 THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
Central India ^ stoppages there extended over (other) six years and on
; ;
his return it took him three years to reach Ts'ing-chow. The countries
through which he passed were a few under thirty. From the sandy
desert westwards on to India, the beauty of the dignified demeanour of
the monkhood and of the transforming influence of the Law was beyond
the power of language fully to describe and reflecting how our masters ;
had not heard any complete account of them, he therefore (went on)
without regarding his own poor life, or (the dangers to be encountered)
on the sea upon and difficulties in a
his return, thus incurring hardships
double form. He
was fortunate enough, through the dread power of
the three Honoured Ones ^, to receive help and protection in his perils
and therefore he wrote out an account of his experiences, that worthy
readers might share with him in what he had heard and said ^.
It was in the year Keah-yin^, the twelfth year of the period E-he of the
' The whole of this paragraph is probably Fa-hien's own conclusion of his
narrative. The second half of the second sentence, both in sentiment and style
in the Chinese text, seems to necessitate our ascribing it to him, writing on the
impulse of his own thoughts, in the same indirect form which he adopted for his
whole narrative. There are, however, two peculiar phraseologies in it which
might suggest the work of another hand. For the name India, where the first '
is placed, a character is employed which is similarly applied nowhere else and ;
again, '
the three Honoured Ones," at which the second ^ is placed, must be the
same as '
the three Precious Ones,' which we have met with so often unless we ;
suppose that ^ j^ is printed in all the revisions for j^^ jtt, 'the World-
honoured one,' which has often occurred. On the whole, while I accept this
paragraph as Fa-hien's own, I do it with some hesitation. That the following
and concluding paragraph is from another hand, there can be no doubt. And it
is as different as possible in style from the simple and straightforward narrative of

Fa-hien.
"^
There is an error of date here, for which it is difficult to account. The
year Keah-yin was a.d. 414 ; but that was the tenth year of the period E-he, and
not the twelfth, the cyclical designation of which was Ping-shin. According to
the preceding paragraph, Fa-hien's travels had occupied him fifteen j'ears, so
that counting from a.d. 399, the year Ke-hae, as that in which he set out, the year
of his getting to Ts'ing-chow would have been Kwei-chow, the ninth year of the
LENVOI. T17
(Eastern) Tsin dynasty, the year-star being in Virgo-Libra, in the

summer, at the close of the period of retreat, that met the devotee Fa- I
hien. On his arrival I lodged him with myself in the winter study ',
and there, in our meetings for conversation, I asked him again and
again about his travels. The man was modest and complaisant, and
answered readily according to the truth. I thereupon advised him to
enter into details where he had at first only given a summary, and he
proceeded to relate all things in order from the beginning to the end.
He said himself, ' When I look back on what I have gone through, my
heart is involuntarily moved, and the perspiration flows forth. That I
encountered danger and trod the most perilous places, without thinking
of or sparing myself, was because I had a definite aim, and thought of
nothing but to do my best in my simplicity and straightforwardness.
Thus it was that I exposed my life where death seemed inevitable,
if might accomplish but a ten-thousandth part of what I hoped.' These
I
words affected me in turn, and I thought This man is one of those :

— '
who have seldom been seen from ancient times to the present. Since the
Great Doctrine flowed on to the East there has been no one to be com-
pared with Hien in his forgetfulness of self and search for the Law.
Henceforth I know that the influence of sincerity finds no obstacle, how-
period E-he and we might join on 'This year Keah-yin' to that paragraph,
;
as the date at which the narrative was written out for the bamboo-tablets and the
silk, and then begins the Envoy, 'In the twelfth year of E-he.' This would
remove the error as it stands at present, but unfortunately there is a particle at
the end of the second date (^), which seems to tie the twelfth year of E-he to
Keah-yin, as another designation of it. The 'year-star' is the planet Jupiter, the
revolution of which, in twelve years, constitutes 'a great year.' Whether it would
be possible to fi.x exactly by mathematical calculation in what year Jupiter was in
the Chinese zodiacal sign embracing part of both Virgo and Scorpio, and thereby
help to solve the difficulty of the passage, I do not know, and in the meantime
must leave that difficulty as I have found it.
' We do not know who the writer of the Envoy was. The winter study or '
library ' would be the name of the apartment in his monastery or house, where he
sat and talked with Fa-hien.
ii8 THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
ever great, which it does not overcome, and that force of will does
not fail to accomplish whatever service it undertakes. Does not the
accomplishing of such service arise from forgetting (and disregarding)
what is (generally) considered as important, and attaching importance to
what is (generally) forgotten ?
INDEX.
A-e (Asita, rishi), page 65. Bodhisattva, 19. Legends of Buddha,
A-le, 54. when Bodhisattva, 30, 31, 32, 38, 73,
Abhayagiri monastery, 102, 105, 106, 74, 105. Maitreya Bodhisattva, 25.
107. Hall of Buddha in, and statue Books of Discipline, the. See Vinaya.
of jade, 102, 103. Brahma (king), the first person of the
Abhidharma, 10 et al. Brahmanical Trimurti, 49, 89.
Ajatasatru (king), 76, 81, 82, 85. Brahmans, 47, 55, 60, 61. The Brah-
Alms-bowl of Buddha, 34, 35, 109, no. man Radha-sami, 78.
Ambapali, 72. Buddha, incarnation of the, 65 inci-
;
Anagamin, 57, 86. dents of his early life, 65, 66 where

;
Ananda, 33, 44, 45, 72, 74, 83; death he renounced the world, 70 ; where
of, inSamadhi, 75-77. he died, 70 ; where he endured austeri-
Ahgulimalya, 56. ties, 87 ; legends of that time, 87, 88.
Anna (mount), 109. His attainment of the Buddhaship,

Anuruddha, 48. 89 ; first labours afterwards, 89. In
Arhan,the, or Arhat (in Chinese Lo-han), Ceylon, 10 1 ; his wonderful stride and
24, 40, 57, 71, 75, 86. Cremation of footprint, 102. Buddha's preaching,
an Arhat, 107, 108. 54, 66.
Arya, 57. Buddhism, Fa-hien's name for, 30.
Asahkhyeya-kalpa, 105. Buddhists, different estimates of the
Asoka, 31, 50; his spirit-built palace, number of 5-8.
and halls, 77; his brother, 77; his
great tope and inscription, 80 ; his Central India, or the Middle Kingdom,
vihara and pillar, 50, 51 ; his city 28. Condition and customs of, 42,
and pillar of Ne-le,
wished to
80 ; 43-
build 84,000 topes, 69; legend of his Chakravartti king, 49, 90.
naraka, 90-92. Champa, 100. Topes and monasteries
in, 100.
Bhikshu, 13, 29, 75, 83, 86, 91, 92, 1 13. Chafichamana, 60.
Suicide of, 86. Bhikshuni, 45. Chandaka, 70.
Bimbisara (king), 81, 82. Chandalas, 43.
Bo tree, the, in Ceylon, 103, 104. In Ch'ang-gan, 9, 10, 115.
Gaya, 88. Both are called in mistake Chang K'een, 27.
by Fa-hien the patra tree. Chang-yih, 1 1,
THE TRA VELS OF FA-HIEN.
Charcoal tope, the, 70. desert of Gobi, 12 ; Shen-shen, 12 ;
Che-yen (pilgrim), 11, 15. Woo-e, 14; Yu-teen, 16; Tsze-hoh,

China, or the land of Han, 13, 24, 58, 21; Yu-hwuy, 21; K'eeh-cha, 22;
100, 109, 113. T'o-leih, 24 ; crosses the Indus, 26 ;
Council in Srataparna cavern, 85 : of Woo-chang, or Udyana, 28 Soo-ho-

;
Vaisali, 75. to, or Swastene, 29 ; Gandhara, 31 ;
Takshasila, 32 ; Purushapura, or
Dakshina, 96-98.
Peshawur, 33 He-lo, or Hidda, in ;
Dana and danapati, 11, 52.

Nagara, 36; Nagara, 38-40; Little
Danta-kashtha, legend of Buddha's, 54,
Snowy mountains, 40; Lo-e, 41;
55-
Poh-na, 41 ; recrosses the Indus, 41 ;
Desert of Gobi, 1 2.
Pe-t'oo, or Bhida, 41 ; Mathura, or
Deva, or Brahmanic god, 19, 50, 79.
Muttra, 42; Sankasya, 47; Kanya-
Devadatta, 60, 86 ; fo lowers of, 62.
kubja, or Canouge, 53 A-le, 54 ; ;
Devala ya, ' The Shadow Covered,' 60, 6 1
Sha-che, 54 ; Sravasti in Kosala, 55 ;
Devaloka, 25.
Too-wei, 63 Na-pei-kea, 64
; Ka- ;
Dharma,the Law, one of the constituents
pilavastu, 64; Rama, 68; Kusanagara,
of Buddhism, 28 at al.
70 ; Vaisali, 72 ; confluence of the
Dharma-gupta, 106, 107.
five rivers, 75; Pataliputtra, or Patna,
Dipahkara Buddha, 38.
77; Rajagriha, 80; Nala, 81 ; New
Discourse or sermon of a devotee in
Rajagriha, 81 ; Gridhra-kfita hill, 83
Ceylon, no. ;
Srataparna cave, 85 ; Gay a, 87

Dragons or nagas, 29, 67, loi ; the
;
mount Gurupada, 92; VaranasT, or

dragon of the Rama tope, 69 ; the
Benares, 93 ; Kasi, 94 ; Kausambf,
white-eared dragon, 52 ; Elapattra, 96.
96; Patna, 98; Champa, 100;
E-he (period), 116. Tamalipti, 100; Singhala, or Ceylon,
Endowments of the monkish communi- loi ; Java, 113 ; Shantung, in China,

ties, and offerings to them, 22, 23, 43, 114; the Capital, 115.
First image made of Buddha, 57.
44, 108, 109.
Foo Kung-sun, 15.
Fa-hien. His surname, and notices of Four great topes in North India, 32 ; in
his early life, 1,2; lived to the age of Central India, 90.
eighty-eight, 2, 3. Genuineness of Four places of regular occurrence in the
his narrative, 3, 4. Different recen- history of all Buddhas, 68.
sions of it, and especially the Corean Four spiritual truths, and four classes of
text appended to this volume, 4. disciples, 57.
Stages of his travels : —Ch'ang-gan,
10 ; Lung, 10 ; kingdom of K'een- Gandhara, 31, 33, 109.
kwei, 10 ; that of Now-t'an, 10 Ganges, 54, 93, 100.
Chang- j-ih, 1 1 ; Tun-hwang, 1 1 ;
Gaya, 87-90.
INDEX.
Gomati monastery, 1 7. Kasi, 94.
Gosirsha Chandana wood, 39, 57. Kasyapa brothers and their disciples, 89.
Gridhra-kuta hill, 80, 82. Legends Kasyapa Buddha's entire skeleton, 93.
connected with, 83. Fa-hien spends Kaun(lin3a and his companions, 94, 95.
a night on, 83. Kau.sambi, 96.
Grove of the Getting of Eyes, 58, 59. Keah-yin (year), 116.
Gurupada (mount), 92. K'eeh-ch'a, 18, 22.
K'een-kwei, 10.
Habits of the Khoteners, 16, 17.
Ke-hae (year), 9.
Hall of Buddha, 20, 102. Kharachar, 109.
Han, the land of. See China.
Khoten, 16-20, 109.
He-lo, 36. King Prasenajit, 55.
Hinayana, 14, 15, 23, 41, et al.
King's New monastery, 19.
Ho-shang, name of, 58.
Kophene, 21.
Hwang-che (period), 9.
Kosala, 55.
Hwuy-keen (pilgrim), 11, 15.
Kwang-chow, 114.
Hwuy-king (pilgrim), 9, 18, 22, 29, 36.
Kwan-she-yin, 46, 112, 113.
Death of, 40, 41.
Hwuy-tah (pilgrim), 18, 29, 36.
Le E (prefect), 115.
Hwuy-wei (pilgrim), 10, 15.
Le Hao, 12.
Hwuy-ying (pilgrim), 10. Death of, 36.
Legends of Buddha in North India, 29,
30, 39; as Bodhisattva, 31. Of his
India, 10, 14. (North), 24, 28, 29.
danta-kashtha, 54, 55.
(Central), 28, 42. (South), 47.
Legends of Takshasila, 32.
Indus, the, 26. Crossing it, 26 ; re-
Legends of topes and monastery, 53, 73.
crossing it, 41.
Lichchhavis, 71, 72, 76.
Jambudvipa, 34, 48, 80. Little Snowy mountains, 40.
Jataka stories, 30, 31, 32, 73, 74, et al. Lo-e, 41.
Jetavana vihara, 56 ; burning of the, Lumbini (garden), 67. Birth of Buddha
57. Sympathy of the monks at, with in, 67.

the pilgrims, 58. Park of the, 59. Lung, 10.
Jivaka, 82.
Madhyamayana, 14.
Kanishka (king), 33 and his tope, 34.

;
Mahakasyapa, 45, 85.
Kanyakubja, or Canouge, 53, 54. Maha-maudgalyayana (Mugalan), 44,
Kan Ying, 27. 48, 82.
Kao-ch'ang, 15. Maha-prajapati, 55, 66.
Kapilavastu, 64-68. Mahayana, 14, 16, 21, 41, et al.
Karanda Bamboo garden (Karanda Maitreya Bodhisattva, 245 statue of, 25,
Venuvana), 84. 28, 109.
THE TEA VELS OF FA-HIEX.
MaSjusri, 46, 79 (a Brahman). hridaya-(sastra), Sfitra of 2500 gathas,

Mara, king, 74 Pisuna, 83 88.
; ;
the Parinir\"ana-vaipulya Sutra, Maha-
Mathura, or Muttra, 42. sahghikah Abhidharma, 99.
JMerchants (five hundred), 89. Pe-t'oo, or Bhida, 41.
Monasteries, or Sahgharamas, 1 7 ,2 8, et al. P'ing (king of Chow dynasty), 27.

Monastery (Goniati), 17. Plain (Central and South India), 47.
Monastery of the Great Heap, 52. Poh-na, 41.

]Monastery (Pigeon), 96-98. Poonah, or Jumna river, 42.
Monkish customs, 44-47. Prasenajit. See King
Monkish food out of the ordinary hours, Pratyeka Buddhas, 40, 53, 74.
44. Procession of images at Khoten, 16-19
Monks (4000 in Shen-shen), 13 ; (4000 at Patna, 79; in Ceylon, 106, 107.
in Woo-e), 15 ;
(several myriads in Purushapura, or Peshawur, 33.
Khoten), 15. Influence of the, 42.
Quinquennial assembly of monks, 22.
Quinquennial assembly of, 22, 23.
Mother of Buddha (Maha-maya), 48,
Rahula, 46.
56, 65. Rajagriha (new and old) legends and
Muchilinda (dragon), 89.
incidents, 80-86.
Nagara, 29, 36.

Rama and its tope, 68, 69.
Nala, 81.
Relics of Buddha : — spittoon, 23 ; alms-
bowl, 23, 34, 35, 89, 109; tooth, 23,
Nanda, 65.
105, 107 ; skull-bone, 36, 37 ; pewter
Naraka, 90.
staff, 39; Sahghali, or Sahghati, 39;
Ne-le city and pillar, 80.
hair and nails, 39 et al. ; shadow, 39,88.
New Rajagriha, 81.
Retreat (the summer), 10, 11, 22, 29,
Ninety-six sorts of erroneous views, 62.
Nirgrantha, the, 82. 113, 117, et al.
Nirvana, 14, 27, 33, et al.

Sakra, 30, 34, 49, 50, 60, 80, 81.
Now-t'an, 10.
Sama, io6.
Samadhi, 76.
Onion mountains, 20, 21, 23, 24.
Sahghali. See Relics.
Pao-)'un (pilgrim), 11, 15, 36. Sang-king (pilgrim), 11, 36.
Paramitas, the, 46 ; Prajna-paramita, 46. Sing-shao (pilgrim), 11, 21.
Pari-nir\'ana, 33, 57, 73. Sahkasya, 47.

Park of The
'
rishi's Deer-wild,' 94. Sariputtra, 44, 81, 82.
Pat;aliputtra,or Patna,77; monasteries of, Sha-che, 54.
78,79; hospitals and dispensaries of, Shadow of Buddha. See Relics.

79i 97~99- Manuscripts copied there, Shay-e, 63.
98-99 ; the Mahasahghika rules, Sar- Shen-shen, 12.

vastivadah rules, Saiiiyuktabhidharma- Shikshapada, or ten commandments, 46.
INDEX. 123
Singhala, or Ceylon, loo-iii. Manu- Tripitaka, 10.

scripts obtained in, in. Trisharana, 46.
Smasanam, 84. Ts'in, 15, 23.
Snow mountains, 24. Ts'ing-chow, 115.
Soo-ho-to (Swastene), 29, 30. Tsze-hoh, 21.
Sramana (Sraman, Sha-man), 14 et al. T'un-hwang, 11, 12.
Sramanera, 45, 69, 70. Tushita heaven, 25.
Srataparna cave, or cave of the First
Council, 84, 85. UpaU, 66.
^ravasti, 55, 56. Topes and legends of, Upasena, 82.
56-61. Utpala bhikshunt, 49.
Srotipannas, 67, 86.
Subhadra, 71. Vaisakha (mother), 59.
Sudana, 106. Vaisalt, 72.
Sudatta, 56. Vaisyas, chiefs of, 38, 47.
Suddhodana, 64. Vanity of life and of the body, 54, Q'-
Sj-mpathy of Indian monks with pil- Varanasi, or Benares, 94.

grims, 41. Vihara, 36, 37, et al. King's grant of a
new \ihara to monks in Ceylon, 108.
Takshasila, 32. Vimoksha tope, 38.
Tamaliptt, 100. Vinaya, or Books of Discipline, 9, 10,
Tao-ching (pilgrim), 9, 18, 29, 36, 99. 98, et al.
Tathagata, 63. Virfldhaha (Vaidfirya), king, 63, 67.

Three Buddhas anterior to bakyamuni,
63, 64. \\Tien the law of Buddha first went to
T'o-leih, or Darada, 24. the East, 27, 28.

Topes, 17, 40, 53, et al. Buddha him- Woo-chang, or Udyana, 28, 29.
self assisted in building a model tope, Woo-e, 14.

39> 40.
Trayastrirnsas heaven, legend of Buddha's Yang-chow, 115.
ascent to and descent from, 48, 49. Yang-low, 10.
Treasuries of the monasteries in Ceylon, Yu-hwuy, 21.
103 ;
rule regarding, 104. Yu-teen, or Khoten, 16.
i+0 iii&
M ^ it
.^ M. B
^;r ^^ ^, ^ m
;lii> -^ ^
# ^;f ^
H If
2r. A
m m
A ^.
4^ it.
' After j^, S, RI insert

^f^.
^ S, M ^. ' S, M ^. * S, M ^.
fs mm + pg
pg
^. ^ sg m. m, !fn ^ ^ m, m ^ w, m w
w % ^> '^ if m m m m w B, n m '^
m m f^ W" iM -M.
- m. in m. m. ^ m, m>
m ^ i^ % ^ ^ ^
- m m m m i^ ^ M
+ m^'r^ M. #. T m ^. a. w- ^ i^ ^
r^ ff m M m f^ M, m r^ m m iF> m m
^ ^ n ftm^'U. M ^. ^ A a X ^ ^.
^ym ^ n
^> g. ^ m m X m m
î;> m
m ^jf m m ^> m n, ^ pi s, î p«i ric m
^ If y$ ^M ttj ^ ^ t# IP A Jit >e, /i^
m m> t^ ^ ^ ii m' v^> m t. m \u 'A m.

m.> u m> ^ fii
'^ m m m. ^ 1^ 1^ m A
M ^ m m> }i m' ^ A m m m> m ^ m
^ w m r^ ^n '^ m, t^ m ^ y^. ^ iif^> n
M m M. ^ m m A m '& m n, ^ m A,
^>m M m mrm m m m a i^ z. ]^t ^4^
m ^ ^, m^ M M m m ii ^ m^^
\^ m
^ m m m ^ ^, M m m.^ M n\ f m m
m M.. ~ m ^
-\^
^> f\i m M M m m ^.
m o w m m> ^ i^ m" m m M "B m n
A. m ^ m, 'i:> m pjrn A ± n -t n m
Wc m m. *" M ^ m n\> ^,^n,M a. m
S. ¥ )^ # B ^P' ^ If ^- ^ j^ + ^ A.
'
J i^-
' ^^ #t W. ' S
^J.
* S, M omit. ' M omit.
S,
' S ^J ^ ; M ^ ^. ' After ^, S, M insert j£. « M omit.

S, » M omit.
S,
'" S, M omit. " S, M omit. " S, M ^. "

J ^fj. » S, M omit. '^ S, M omit.
+m mmm
^ n n m m m m tk "^^ "^ ^^ ^> ±. m
m M m. A ^ m, m M
m. ^ -^ m. ^ m
m i< m m i< r^ "^ T y ^ m ih =^ m
m, m> n ^> m n >k m. \^n ith '\^> w p^
B ia m '^ m n m a J^> m ^ M n'f^
:?^ ^f ib n ^. T. i ^. M a, m M A> ^>
M. >^ n M =? 'A^. w m m w n\, Tff m m
A n^ ^ i^^ y$ B# ^ ^ ^ B#. -
tif ^ ^
^ m> ^^"^ m ^ "^.r^ m.m ^ n -Y z^
n m m. ^ i^ ^ m ^>r^ f^ - m B ^
n ti ^ + # ^ pt m B.
*tfe >p^ ^Cl^ w> w.
]^, ^ + B, ^. It. i ^. ^^ W, ^ ii: ^ ^
^ 0. r. ^ ^ it 1^ - ^ M ^v^^ ra ll:h
^ ^. B. m m m m "^ A m "^ =:- n m

# m 7K. ^g 1^ ^
ffi # H#, itb + i
mA m M ^.n '& m ':bl i^ n
i^, ith M 4 pf n^ ^. ^R' # PI m m 0.
^ ]^, ^ B # 1^. M ^ :^ IE M i-di II. ^'
# ^ ^. 5i =. m T ^^f 1^ ^ ^
>li ^ ^
* H^ ^ ^8 ^. ^s ^ ^ ^ ft. M. itb 1^ m
^ S^ Ui ^ ^ -b ft. 1^^ ^ if -^^ îJ. 1^ M
M ^. m 0. ^ + ^ !i 5i ^ A P^. JI6A.
:I>H. -flc ^. # # iW ^ M
^:^ M itB ;1* ± A
^ ^ H! ^ ^. 0. A f. A ^. îJ ilf. ^ iW
> S,M ^. ^ Contracted form in text. ' jM j^. * After j^, S, ]\I insert '^.
' S, M j[^. ' S, M j£. ' After ;|>|>|, S, M insert ^. ' Should be ^ ^.
2^0 +0 ^ + pg
ft '^ # A
m M itk m ^.
î is. If. ?t A iii^. ^ 1^ itk
M ffi] :Nl! '^. rsi ^ ^. i^

m. m B. # If.
i r # 51J m
ft. 7i< 4- A in :! *
m m « N" 1^
It ^> ip
m ^. n IB. A H P
Tic ^ >^ ^ ± # A psr 11
t ^ A. iiT m ^. :^.
11 A ^4i
iS; ft ±. ^ O
Bra. A M. pT # ^
51] ^ it f^ ^ §? ft
W II itb
#
^ ill A. itk' =L
lif ^ m fi # ^.
ifr.
^ m -»^ m m A - f^ m M
m. IE A M, ± >^
PiM ;^ itt: A jl^ 4^ m n
ffl ^. m m A #. n t^. '^ m u m
^^ m ^ ;^c
" S, M jj;. * S, M ^ ; and elsewhere. M ^ t^. '
" S, M omit. ' S, M^ :.

''
Text has a vulvar form. ' S, M ig ' S, M invert.
- + ^9 im
m ^ m.m "^^ 7J m. t^. m ^> b> ^
m ^p ^.
H#, 5<^ t)t. i' ^ Lij m m ^f
H. IS
^ ®
#. fl n ^1 ffi # n#. iô D #^ M 1*
^ ^ ft li 11 iE, fH iii ^ A i*: ^ W ^

-, M », 7> f, 13:, Tit * i: M ^. pji
^ ^ M ^ ^ ^ Ic B, B, 'g'o ill ^ m ^
H 41'=^ i^Â ^1 vffi. t^ pg M ^ ^;
^. ^#a. #^-ta^§»^B
|g ^ ^, 1^ +i Is ^ it i fi ^. ir
m n\ ^ M, ^> r;m. # ^ ± "(t It
^ ^ M ^ il ii^ '^^ ^ >^ # it] ^ fl^ *A'
^. A, A tr ^ JH A ^ iS € ^ t^
^ ^ .^ A K M i^ H#. ^ ^ ^ m
#, m m m> m, ^ -t ±.
.
lij.
m n M B. A â ^ B> m
Ht H
m s. ^ m n M ^' ^ 1^ M ^ ^ IM ^
% ^. w. ^ci\ & m i^. m> ^- n> b. m
^ H n 1^ B. # ^ ^ * fi
^f, ffii ^
a & ^ ft-^# M ^ ^ ^F m =f- m'
' M insert '^. After ^, S, M insert îj pj^ ^.
After :^fe, S, '
* s, M :j^. s, M ||.
' s, M -^ s, m '
» S,M omit.
-f".
itt;.
« Text, with ^[ inside. S, M -|-.

'" " S, IM ^. S, M omit. '' S, M omit.
iiii&
±.
^ m
If M:
M M. î
^ A. g
^ ^ ^
W ^ B
^! m m
^ ±. f^
m m i^
f^ m m
^ m m
^ * ^
^ ^ m
^ m, ^
^. 4 itb
;fL +H *;fL + u
Wi
ffl ^ + - ^ :^ ^ ?^ B I®, 1* m + 7^ 5ij
A - i^ ^ + M il. ^ B i 5l5. tiJ. ;S^&.
^ % ^.^ % v^.^ m n ^ ^'^.^.^

m %. "^ % % f^ ^ ^ n ^ % - m %
^ ^ r^ '& n '& ^. ^ m ^. ^ ^ '^ ^
M ^ )i n, + ^ 1^ ^ ^. t^ Ui ra it ill.
m, ;g M. ft t: ^. ^ ^ ^ W ^. :^
iRf ^Cl\
El fb bI 5i ^ ^ ±. ^ # ^ ^. -> t§' ;'L
^^^^--^^ M^Î-a. 11 + ^^
;e ,^. ^ ^ ^ ^ ;^ *n ft -t ^ Si.
4*fe lii.
H#. ^ H. ^, ft # A. *. ;i i: a.^ #
lii ^fi
5^5 1^ 11 ^ -^
=f- fi Y^ B. ^ r^ ^ ® 'Ji
# ft It A ^ M # f^ i M HR ^ ^ B|l
fil.#. - K. ^. ^ M «. ^. M* M. ^ iifs
'«c ^ ^. -t ;g 0. i^. ^ 3^ #. 1^ I n 75r .
^ - ^ ^= @
fln f^ ^ # ^ ^ ^^M'i ttl
ft fi ffi ^ M i. ^. ¥
fiJJ, pT P^ ^. IJ. )ii
ffn ij'^ Wo ^ ^ >^ ^. ^ # n ^. ^ rfo '/^
p.1 PI o - ^ m n> i^ m m m 7^ )^
jiii
a i& m ^ ^ M ^ m m> m ^, ^ 1^. -\^
^ tf m ^ ft. ^n ^ {^ i Jl 0. ^ -i. iis
# -^ -b 4^. ft ô .in fjfc ^p w 1$ 1^ ji. la

'
An obsolete form in text. = S, M ^. sS,Mj£. W. *S,M^. 'S,M^.
w. A+H
m m. #. m m, ¥ it. # ^ A i^
^ m ^^ -^ m
ir'- m m i§- pg ft ^ ft n, ii, K A
n. if ffii ft. izg m %
r^m m> m ^, m A. m
m s ft ^ ^ A m
>ci\
^ A.m m' ^^ tt tt
^ m M ^ m -LL -^ fqj Si ti
^.^ 1^ i> m
^
\<x ^ ^. \>x ^- m, m
H ^. H A. ^ m m -^
m^'m ^. ± B
M M m ^ ^ ti
# m pf ^ A M ^ % ^^ ^
"f-,±> m m 5-. A ^,
n m z, ^. u
+' m
H IP it H 1^ A 4.
m ^ M
m m w i^ \i\A^' ft A y^ m r^ ^
U W. m' A' u 0. A. ft B ^. % tt
A, ^ + ^ ft. ^^ m m
m m 0. ft ^
^ i^ 3E M,^ 0, M £: 'If ^ M A
M ^ ^ m M 'M m n, ^ «!
^1, ^ ^ ^.
psr i '^. >^
ic ft A 3E îf J? p|^ ^.
'
^, ^ M :^.
Before M S has ;
* S, invert. '
^.
^Î
After A, S, M insert ^. « After "pj*, M inserts i. ' S, ]\r omit.
S, M 2|S. W. S, M omit
' >» Test has ^ on left. " S, M ^. '=
S, M omit.
-t+= mmm A+
M A n ^ m> ^ ^ \f^
ih>m It. ^ W
;e.
n ^' n m m, - m *-
^ -t if ^^. 5^
^ - ^ -^ # ft, 5t. J£ A. ^ A il ^ ®
m ^ mm ^ M ^ m m 5l^. IiJ it ^ A
m
"f-, ^ ^^ ^ - m \u ^ m i^ A m m,
^ m. '^'m iu m ^ m> b* m m. ^ ^ 3
1^ m m ^> ±. fk. ^, m n. m i^ + tH
riT
w m m. t:> ^ ^ ^ m M ^ It ^. ^ #
^ z- m % M mc m M m A M ^ M ^
m ^ B ^ m m ^ ^ ^ m. % # H„ ^
z> m Pi ^. m> m. ^, + m.
m B, m e., ^^ m m ^ m m m ^ ^ ^
pT -M ^ ^Ci' w i^ ^ * ^ ^n A I* il ttl
r. r^ ^ m' m M ^. B ^. 1M' 5ij ^ * ji

+ vi 'H A. 1. w. m i^ it.
5t. So m. \h ^ ^ - M' B ^ f±. ^ A ^.

^ ^ .^. jii m ^ i^ m m M i^ #. K. *llJ
m m M ^ ^> - ib J£ ^ iô ^ ^ IE' v^

m ty itl^ ;1^, ^ ^ ^. ^ ^. ;^. H Hi ^ ^
^ A W m +
m 5t #. g #S ^. M ^ J^ ;^^ ^ %. S* M.
S S ^ 5 '^
fSi ^ M. m> ^ =:^ ^. i m, ± m m m
lil>
M li> if X ^. 5t % M ^ m m> m ^ A
'
S, M _[};.
^ S, M g. '
S, M invert. * S, M ^. ^ M |jf
S, M J^, ' After J^, S, M insert ^ ijjl.
-t+H i& +H
:k ^ n. tk
^. is m, ^ }5: :k ;§^ 4 ^ ^ X ;J^ itk ^
i H.
•&' ft B ftt
yt + 1^ ifi. ^ - ^. *& M
^ m ^ m # "f itb ^"^ Ift
^ ^ 1^. -t ;{^ # i§ H :^ # ft #
n,^ m' ii
n m, m n # Jp pf ^4^ Wi m n ^,
^ m m )^. ^ u ^^ ^ ^
m "^ M O ^
^7i 7^ #. vi # m. #
i$ ^ m> m ^ :# - II. ^Cl\
m ^ M. it ip 1^ te ik ^, pT ^^ ^P
i-ili, pT
m
Ttc 1 i
*i: # >?^ gifj
M m ± %,^ -^ %^ m,
+ 1 p, ^ T ^ ^ it P pT fS, fS,
m ii ^ ^ + ^ # X X -b
*&. ffi
0. 2^ ® ^. A ^. ^ 1^ ###=?•
m m ^ m * ^ ft ^ - ^. ^. 5'J
m m, ^ ^
^ + ;«^ ft ^ ;^ # ft m, # ^ 11.
a, ;i ^= ^ ^ ^ci\
r. it f^ 1 ft ^ ^ ^ ^, ^ ^ M ^ î:>
H If #ff ^ ^ J P^ fb i ^ 1^
itt:
A A M. m W ^ #. W ^. #.
ila 50c
' After
|f|5,
S, W insert After Îj, S, M insert ^. ' S ^.
mA-
H
^y> + ^=^
- M MS >^
ItT*J^ 3X5?^
#, li #, ^ m w
^ B -T ffn 1^1 H# A
;?(J ff. ^
;^ A 11
+ ft 1, {^. ^ ^^ 5iJ it
A m ^ e ^ f± ft^. A, PI ^, rirj :^
#, M ^!^
}I ^ ^ ^ A 5l5 m ±
#. a. >5 f :;^ ;1ii PI ^
^ # ^ M 75r itb # ^
^ m ^±, @ ^ #
^ ^, ^ ^
^-K. B9 R
Hi
Fji ;#: î
^ * M M ^1^ '4l
pin
.lit
|M>^
i^
f^ * # M. ±
t^ m> A li ^ A m ^.
it rfn W. A liJ if m
^ it .^ m A
A- n B^ ^ fi^ •^ )t.
t?r ^ ;^ ^ :^
ft m n. ^' ^ ^ m m, ia
^ H, O A ^ lilt. A' #.
^. ^^ # it ^ 5i.
# M ^ W, A
îlJ ')&, ;i t^. IE
— m m m m m 1th 31^ ^ #
&p p ^
» S, J\I
"^
S, M invert. S, jM omit. ' S, M omit. S^. ^S,M^.
E 2
m.-\'~ iii& K+H
^^ ^. ;g ^ + ^. Tit. ^^ i
itl:
^ ^ ^^ ^ #-
J^. m li^ ft II # ^ tii
:* n §i. i:^ £ # i
H ^
^^ fUtj
* ^ A ^ ^>m \^ A A, A f
^ ft ir ^ ^ it m ^^ i^ i M iMi
^. ^ #ff ^ 5^ i ^ A \ n n
n ^ M. f^ ^ ft a A ff A m M. fi
pT ^ H ^.1^ -t
fl
"^ -i^ m ^ ^ it
i f^,
J
"ai
i«:
M- 0i
# itkM M Bt^ ib W :t itb ^ ir
ft. ^ it P
o e 1^ ^ t- + n E, ft B. a
.^ ^ ^ ^ ^
AM.
lit #. itC >^ iJ-^ fl
1th ^. ^£ ^. ft 1^ + 1: Pi: A j^
^ ^ ;^. #. ^ ffi #. ^ >?^ ;i^ f^
tf •«;' -4-
it s» Jl:b 1^ W. ^ itb f^
r. ^ Wl n )g fl ;{^ 4- ^ jt B.
m w W ith^ + W ^^ itk 9
^ ^, ^ - IS 7|a m 5f5
M. II * ^.ft. ^ -ô u
^ ^ tr.^ ^.* ^ it ^. 14 — 11 is,
T H ^ ^h ^ ^. ^ ^ ^
;g ;t, m H I' ^ m m - M ;g
' After
P^ , S, M insert ;?(S.
''
S ^. ^ After B#, S, M insert "^.
* S, M ^. ^ S, M !^. « So, S, M. Text has ^ instead of ^. ' S, M omit.
H+H $ra + H 1^ H& ^H + H
KM f^'
A W 5IJ
^. n PUB yJ A S — B,
fô it liJ ^
m ^ ^ ^ m
^ 'If
B A. ^, k m m Ji
m ib ^ ;^ ±
^ ^ ffij
la: M ^ m ^,
#'
ft. ^ ô fA ^> -^ 0. ^ A
# ^ ^ m ft M
^ fill Ji Ji' iP itb T ith
M. A
^h 111 + ti ip A 5,1
+ + ip ^ T it. 3E
^ ^.
MAO
m A ^
f:3e
m m
^ ^ it
m - z- n
'ik i ^>
^ # H 5fc §
• S, M omit. ' Should be >/g. '
J ^. R- * S, M omit. = S, M omit,
S, M repeat. ' S, M ^. » S, M J^. W. • Text has -^ on the left.
E
1# Pi^^
if. B#^ *
^±. Pi i^
# # M ^ '/^ A,
H. itT itb s n ^.
m "^ A S B A
ip ^ m % ji<, H, ^. A IP,
'ft # 0' i^ IP
tt}, m 5l5 W. f^ P«1
IP w> I, ^ J^ :^. g
HI %. i. W i ^.
^ PI 1^ ^ s ^ IP it
A m A. A ^ #.: m. H^
^, A, ^ ^^ yf If p £. s ill!
'/^ f^. ^.
pjx m ^ ^.H ^ lir -^ >j< f^
ft, H ^ f^ f^ m. e id!
^ it #, '^, M m -^ A. m A.
i 4 ^. m ^ ±
# ej p. ^ ^ 5
ft'
©
^ IP
S ^ mm
m ^ 1^ A
A Hi. H # A
It ^ A
lie
ft
^Jc
it ^. ti 1^ ^ ^.
^> ^ ^ — £
4 ^ ±= «e. # Af^
' S, M ^. ' M omits. 2 S, M |^. • Before ^,, M insert
S,
' S, M P^. ^ S, M omit. '

J .
' S, M omit. '' S, M omit.
-+H ^r. + = m
M
jî tr. /î :i/5 ^ 1^
# l>il *E :^ ^ ^
H M ^;f ^ >^. 1^ f^
m ^ w^
m $B, fir % ^> ^\ f^ w J^ ± i ^
•;^ f^ -£ ^ ^ n w n % B.
15^
-b n i& m >ffc
A> M. va m # 7> m T.
it B ^ T.
»^, 1^^
^ i^ m iJ^^> M H ^^ :^ Mil wK,

rfc
m m s. m m, ft
121 ^ n ^ >^.
£. ?f in ^. A ^ iU ^ ± ^ fit
O ^ ^. ^ :^ m u m m
*e.
^ ^ - N" A ^ ^
>^, M m ^ (sj )Mi> IS)
H m m W M ^ ^ ^.
:t'@
^ m z ft ^ ^ A m
^ M m "W r^ ^,
w. tr 1^. i^ ^. 1^ ^ % ^ M m
;i fel 1^ A- m ^ ft it =f-
m ?f ^ ^ >^ K A m iH:
^ m.m B#.:^ 0#. /P) jî m.t

m n. % BET m pg -b M 5 ith
m M IS ;1^ ^ 1^ m ^ m. ±
^' m n
'
S, M omit. S, M S, M omit. S, M
s, M m ^. ' S, M omit.
Mi -+^ +^
zfcr
1: itk Ht. ^ A n :^
pTl k
;! ffi ^ ,VHr dbfc
^ m *lfe m i^ ^ ^ y^ +
f& B
]i:t M, itE -/S^,
in M if.
J'
^ ^ ^ :|li 5lJ
M 4^ it n m ^
^ * ^ ^ n ;i, o s
m M., ^ I* #• 1^ L * II i5^, it ^1.
f^ # ^ lit
m. n ^ ^ ^, R
- ^ n ;{^
ffl
s ^ fi m. m m, ^ tti 'ft
^1 m t- ^ m ^.
ffir\ itk in ^ li M ^» ^
*. ^ ^P
^ m m' ^w ^ it ^ i 'M, •fflT.
m ^ 'M 1^ J: n # 1^ .^. ^
^ ra" ^ ^. A M ^ M, mi 4^. ^
ii. X
5 ti
tl^ M. f^ 1^. »ii\i
^ ^ 5lJ ^. BS ^ # ;tc m m itC
m 1^ ^ =4 R :^
In). S» :ir ffi
H M; f^ -fct 14-
+ l: ^ 4 K&B =f s if ^
^ j^ î ^*i" l^jc a. ^, m M. m= B, ^ m
^ ^ ^. 5 ^, 7^ 4^ f^ m m
1^ ^ * m ^ m ^ N- .^ f'.
1 S, M ^. '
M A- ' ^' '^^ °™'*- ' ^' ^^ °"'''-
^
%-^r. ^+Hiiii&
M m ^ M
w m m
Vi ^
til PI ^
m ^K ^.
At n m
M, A. ^
/lite '|*T~ *
JZr. ;^ 51
^ ^. it
nM ^ ^ If i
M ^- 4"
^ ^. —
^ III n
^ ^ :k
-^ M Wi
#. .#m
^ m M
A ^ ±
:^ # ^. +^ ;g
M ^ B#
^^+n iiii& A+ -
m m ^ m M m m m m, ® ^1] in^
- m ^ ff % ^k
I* ^, i"^ m m m - ^ ^.
ij 4 1th it -
;^ H, * ^. « Â ® it PI ^, #, 4*
m # ^^ ^ M
^> m sM m ^ m s. A '^
i m ^ m ^
#? 1^ H Ft^ ^^ if >?^ ^, #, # ^ ft
^ 4» M, ^ H f^ M, ^ N" ff ii i:^ ^> III
Efe
^ pfe 'St
SI j^. ^ 3l ^ ^. n m.
|J^ ijip, ^ *e' ff. N" ib liJ iM:
^ p|? itb
m. m m ^ ^ A S. n it.
'W O #, i M.
Idt fS), 1^
- [^
llj
IP ^ f^ A if M -^ ;m tr 7i,
% ^ :^ '^ m m m> ^ %\\
±. n ^ m n m M. ^k # * i«: itb
^ II =f m, g ^
ith uj. f^, f^ îj,
^ Elf ^ m - ii, i^ ^ *B — ^
^:^ f)r îJ
^ ^ m w w ^^
iiii, m> it. :^. IP.
4^ 4 Mi
4^ M. ib + + ^, ?i :i A ^ M m
?^ H i 1^ iS
i5^ >^ Jl If,
^, N" + M, ^ m ^. '& m. ft # :^
^k m. #. m t^ ib >^ i # tti f>5ff itt:
' After IJ:|^,S,M has ^j^r)-. After ^, S, 1\I has wk. ' Text has the |& beneath.
-b-h ;A+ .i
^.
mmm + r.
^ ^ ^l ^,
iija m> # ;i* m. % m'^
^ m M> s: ^ jK'BS
0. ^' m ^ m m> m
m m w m ^ ^.
m, m'ij/ f^ A ^ z ^ ^ \U, ^
m n. m> ^h ^^ s ^. :^ 0. W. M M\\
5lc, ^
ft ^ * ;g M^
>Et, ^ ^ ®.
0>J1 N"
A ^ ^ PI ;?: it 11 ft ;^ ^ f^ ^f^ W
m p«ii^ mi
^J^ m
i!>A. ^ # i ^- ^v :^ ^ m m> m -i- m
PI ^ #. *B ^ ^ m. m. -^. ^ -^ m. it, 75?
5itH ^^, f± ft pT ^ It. :^^ ê^ 4 ô

A :^ #
rife >A^
P«1 it ^ ft^'m ^ '^' ^k m'
ft. pT m,
^^ -t
i:|i i ;«^ ^ #. 5t. m ;^.
^ ^ ^= i
+ |J^ t^
W ft w
Itli ff r. f* S <f i^ W P5.
TTCô IR. 3E Ji: ^, ^

^ 5t.
^ ^ M ^ 11 3E ^.
M> H 'I.
* PI ^
^ -^ ;?, ^
it m, pt m it M
ft ^ M. m - ^^'
^ ;g ft A.
izg m
i + zi ^-b^^ 1S ^>^ + ^ H&
^ m "^ i^ it m ^ m
^ ^ ^ m, m M n
itf: w 'It.
N" €. M + n fi m
^ It ^y'a.
i m m M. ^ m iit tJ^^
W S. 1"
O # It -^ m ^ m
Ml] N"^^
It - m" p. fi M; ig^,
11^ n P
^R f^ ^B,
i^ It M ^ m m 1^ A
1^, 5f^ m # itk
0# fe ii
M itg ^ ^ fi la m ^'
!i, IS i^, M W N" it itB
m m ^ m ^. It,
t^ ^ ±, ± fb *^ ^ ^ IE
1^ -^ ^^
^ It ii. It. ^: # ^ #
îj ^:^ o J:|i ft if it, ^
H 'ft, m m i^
n -b n ^
> S, M omit. = S, M ^. = S, M omit. * S,M omit. ""
After 1^,
S, ]M insert
Jj^.
' After
/L, S, M insert
^ ^. ' S, M omit. « S, M >^ |}i.
^ S, M omit. " S, M ^|J.
urn*î+- ra+-
A m ^ '^ ^ * 11 #
B, m H#, j^* A A, ^ m ^ H. ft.
tir H. 1 -fê ^ ± m m -^ bk M
m ik m "^ m> - it «• n
^ m m m, ^^ 1^ H f^ f^
r^ m ±, m ^
i$ ^. Ml] A
\>A A ^
^, 1^ m m p«i A.
^ i^ B^ :^. ^0^ A ;g
i^ i^ in W^ ^
fSl ^ ^. ^ *J:
§1 ^ i A i^
P, , ^R W. ^.
^J>M ^ i i
^ 0, W. ^ H.
A ^
lir .^ ^^ # ^.
m m m m, m >e ti
m. Tie
m A ^^> M ^ in ^
^' ^ 4- n =f- fi m
m m ^ M f-, A m.
m m A i^ m 5t IE
^. #. ^ 1^ M
^ ^j^
ti #. *£
ir ^ ±. m i^t
mm
m m> ^ m m O ^ il> "l^ m m 3E B.
m ih # # ib. # ±f m ^ ^ a ^ ^'
^, ^ îj € ^ itE 4 i ^ ^. m. ^ i
rirj :^ }Mi> M Jmi, :^ ^ ^ ft ii la t^ w.
1^ i^ m B m> m.
^ ^ ^ -^ ^ ^ m :^> m> ^ M Jr. t^
* ^. ¥ pt i'^. Tic ^p m'
m ^ m m w m. tt m m i^ m n ^
m ith :^. m m ft ^' m ^ m m ^. ^ nt
r^ M ^ n m> ^ ^ i m fr-
^;f. iti: m
n m i^ M n m m ^;&> ^> m. m ^. m.
^, n i^ -t M ^ ^ n r; M. $ m m
f^ + M. ^ [g. w jf ^ m # ^ pT
-ft :n 4- M. Jtb ^ m m. ^ ta m m m
# ^ ^ ^ ib ^, m m m m m m^ ^
;;^ ^, ^ t ill m m. ^ u> m m ]it w
'^ 5iJ ^„ ;^ ffij ;t. 4. H it m> ^> ^ *.
^r ^ ^ ± it :# ^ tl^ i A it ^ ^
r^ n n ik u fe ^5ij iit Y^ ip A H il,
# ^ F^ ^ ia, ^, M •iJ'Mt ^ ;^ ^ ^
®. ^ A ^ ^ ^ ^?i^;A:il:A^
1^ ^' 1^. ;t, ^ ^5 ^ ^. ?«. A m if. itb 1^.
m 1^ A m m
<if^ # a ii ii. ^§. P^ 5lJ.
n ±» ^ # ^ W itli -ir
'
S, M omit. ^ S, M omit. = S, JNI omit. * So, but should be yg. '
J ^. R.
« S, M omit. ' S, M ^. ' S ^. ' In text, with ^ at the side.
»=+- im =.+=.
m
-+- *z: + z: 1^ 11^^ -+-
ft A. i: 3E ^^ i& m m ^ ^ m î
M m "f-
m ^ n m ^> o m $M m ^
* ii ?^ m m m M m ¥, ^
= ^, m> m. O M % m m ^ ^ ^,
it' =^ ^. u ^ m ^ ^> ^
M ^ ic tr >t, + M. ^ i: -^
A m. f- + W M. 5^ ^. ^ :ir.
ft n, =. m m m '^' m ^.
- ^ m - m i^ ^ -i.
^. ffi^ Mr ^. ^, m> m m n r^
B.>
M^ A i: MiT rTT
m
-
M ^ ^ m ^ w
^ #
tii. m ^ ^ ^ A>m.
m m. ^ m m a, lia m. n ^ :& <ff
W M H#. ^ ^ m m. m, ^ "^
A Bo m m ± m ^ m m ^
th ^ ^ M z- A, ns,
tii i^, ± M 'M m ^ M
m m ^ M, ^ i ^M
n ^ ^ m m ^. ^
n n PI It ^ ^, ±, m M. "IB.
A ^ li- m A 'X ± -x m ±
P^" M Mi)
S, M omit.
^
M omit.
"
S, M omit.
M
'
^ftg^ ;7/j;^ S,M insert
M tg.
^ ff 1^^ ^.
M ^.
S, ''
After ^, S, insert ^fj. S, ' S,
S, M 75f AV. . ' .?

Mistake for " S ^. " After ^, S, IM insert ;^.
f^.
m^f +^
H
m 5i ^ iho it X A
ft A m A M
m'-m ^ ;^ iil! M m ±.
in ^ A
Pi m #r PI ^. M ^ ^ ^ -ffc ^, K.
m n m ^ ^ m n m. m
m m m ^, f^ 4e 3i
f^ ^ PI f i: ^"# m. ti ^
B. g g fe Pi' ^ ffii
.^. ^ W. it 1^ ^ ^:t ^ ^' H.

it B#. S #. H#
^ ^ 'ii> m lit ^f ;{^ ^[^
^, it p^ m 4 ^ ^ m. 11^.
^ ^ m i^ ^;f ^ F^"A # :^. ir.

^> m m m m ^ fj^ ;g ^3^ fli
M. ^ U 'I # m
m M'i TO t^ ^j
it. +
A
ii-. mmA M J^ ^
^^ i ^ * 3i
^ ft ^ it w i-di ^. ^
m ^ u
^. 7^ m ^m
itt: M in m W'^ ^. m w
^ ^ r^ ^ i^. ^[ z,
' S, p.y. |5. " M j^.
S, ' Should probably be J^. * S, M ^|J.
« S, M ^. « S,M omit. ' After |[|, S, M insert ^. '
] )Jk.
' S,M-J^ i^. '" S, M repeat. " S, M g. " S, M omit. " S, M jj^.
" Another form of this in text. " S, M :|^. " S, M ff|. " S, M omit.
" After {^, S, M insert ^. " S, M omit.
;^ +
PI. ^ ^. W ^ ;^ ^ ^. itb Y-^
^ -^ £:! "f ^^ A. ^ ^ ::! il

ib # M A. l; 7> W. ^ + .M.
h ft :k m f^ A 't^ bI fie- ^ i ai
+ m -b % m^ 5lJ >j^ ^ ^ -ffi^ ^.
ti -^ ÎJ ^ *. g H -fer
ii {i itb ^ H 4 # *
# PI. 4 itL -tH, ith. 4 ^» 5l^.
*^
m ^
^ PI # ft. A. ^ -^ 0f ^ 3i ®. :i§
:^. B ® 11 ^ f^ ii: m. ife i-di.^
f^ In], % ^ A ^. ib #. m ^ ^ M.
+ m 5 ft P3 1^ *& ^. It ^:^
^ m itb P^ ii M. # ft If
;e. 5lJ. 5'J
m n Ml >b ^ # ^ M f^ M ^> iiiffi
^[ # Ik t^ #J
'it ^c ,^ va flf.. iiB ^\!>
X it ft #^ ^ t ;g ^ ft M ^ IJ.
^. A ±; Ik ^^ It ^.
^, IP ^. ^ m m # 0. 1^ ffi
S tti ^ S. H^. 5^ ^ ft TO =g^
^ fp ^, Hi ^ ;*: i=ii^ ii:
:k m ia #J ^ ^
JI-S ^ ^ l: 5lJ. P«1
n. ;i ^. i ^ a^ ^^ 3i li
1
S, M
H.
"
S, M omit. ' S, ]\I 7--. ^ S, :\I
]^. ' M j^.
S, M ^Pi. ' S, M ^^. * S, IM. The Corean text is a vulgar form of this,
S
f g M ^.
;
" S, M 'j^. " After ^, S, M insert
-t^.
C 2
mmm A+
M '^ W M ^&,
m m # ^ PI P^ /if ilr
i ^ f^ ^ =f- ^
B. -t m + ^ - m
A is
m m
tt l: ^!^
^ It ± m, m
+ ^. fffl ^ >î
.-SI A ?^. ^ ^ fi it
A ^ M ip A *i
* ^^ m pt ^ m m
IS u, ± m m
^ m i IP # ^. i^
"¥ m m>
^' 4 Mi §N
ip 11
±' f^ n
^ a ^f pr m.
;$l PIf M
'
J repeats. ' S, M j^. '
S, RI omit. * S, M omit. ' After
^,
S, M insert ;?(iv. ' S, M ^. ' S, M i)^^. ' S, M :{^. ' After il^,
S, M insert '^.
-fc+*+-»^+ mi A+
A M 4 m. % 'i> ffi ^t ^ ^ ^ r^ ^
^ m m t^ ia IjiS >^ -t m. bI
A ?§ ;i^ -fc * ^ ^\# i
m\ iu R> H. ith '^ M. ^. f(^^ iife ^ ^. OiW â »
n ^L ^ >^ ^ ^ in
ii itk ^ ii> 1^ itl^ 7K fj i-lli
ipS ^, ;^ m # E A ^0
i^. If ^
^ ^ ^ it ^, :!#, n ^ # ^ ^
m,
m m ^[ P^ ^ î ^' m m 1^
ô II! j^) m m ^. ^ ft fl —
m u -^ !^. ^ ^ ^ w o :^, #ff
ft tr. H f- M<. ^ ^, ^ lib itC
A ^ P^ m ^ m ^ pT ^
K m. ^ ^ o m ^ ^ ^ ® i^ 1
^ ^ $^. ^ ff Itli ^. ft II X^ -t -
m it ^ # f^ ^ ^. W A. itL
15 ^ if ^ M ^ ^, ^. -^^ ^ ft. B A-
^^ m ^. S^ ^ :S m it 1M
::Ô m ^ ^. ^ ^ ^ A
/l^
W t^ it + - fll '^> n ^ m
^ m
m it m ± * ^r ^, ^. fL> jî ^ A ^
^, i^ ^. ft'. ^. ;g *> ^ A.
tn n ^ IP 5ij psr ^ 1^ ^ z.
'
After '2^^, S, M insert \U^. ^ S, M fi^^.
' S, p. y. ^. * So, all recensions
and Julien. Probably should always be V"^. ' S, M omit. « S, M j^. ' S, M omit.
C
m) +
m.
51 +
1^ 5i fH i. ^ f±, i^
^ m K ^ -t i:, ^
m IS T, p f-^ -t m ^^ Jl:h ^ m m
JS Ills j®
ft >^ T i ff Pt 1^ m ^. M.
^h jt il m ^ ± m il. ^ tH:
^ n. # ^ w T m.i^ ffi
^ B# ipT^ P^. 'BO

f«1
;^ -^ ^ ^ A, Hf 1^^ iib. îJ
^ fl li # ^ ii ^
J§ ji ^ ^ ^ :* ± >^ m #
^ ^. -t ft ^
J^. # H i, B. >^ 5lJ
^ ^. 3E M Yf ^ 1^ g -t: fS]
^h ^ ^ ^, ^ PH 7^, PH
:i l: H it^ ^, M ^ T
!§(;= ^ ^ ik
ik '& m \%\ -\'
IP IP
i ^ ^ f± l>^
^h ^ |i ± ;^ -n m ^ i^ ^ iR 55
^ >^ i> 1^ p^ i. ^ ^ H 1^ fi ii
1^' #. P^ ± ^ ^ ft i: ^ 4 ^. -b
^rii ift
'If,4 I? ^. fe #
tt ^ ^ ^ ^
Itk Pi.
tS 1^ 1^ i yi T ^ tffj
n ^. T. #. ^
;, e #, P IP
' After ]gP, S, M insert R. -S, M j^. = S, M omit. * S, j\I invert.
S, MB* ' S, M IS ' s, M m.

;-fc + in* ra+
® ^ ^ 7|j 0. » %^ B.
;g ¥ m M'J. Ill % ^,
ft a,
ii i^« f^ ^, %
§tiM ^ ftf M m ^. i^ n vc
M, A :^ ft m A. m ffi @ i^
1^ Uj ^ ^: ^ w\ m
h g :* ±. m n
Jil.
*8?
iH: A #; ft.
'^ IE ig"i
^1] ^ # m m w.ff ^. 1^ ^ n #
^. n # p^ ^ #
?Rr A ^ Bt
H M.
;!fC A ^ i^. ^.
7?j
^ m m ^. f^ ^
^ o m 1^ * ^Mt
# ^ ^ m ^ m ^ ^^ >^
iJ£
m ^. M
itb ;^. A^ ^
^, m i£ B ^ ^ '& ^ #, îlJ ift
- ^ ^. >!:
T ff m ^ M ^ fi ^
ij'^
î| tft
i^, + M> M. PI i^ \% ^. ^. ^ - ft IM:
m A n m El
i * i n, cm
m. \% m \%
M ^ M, m j^: ft ^ n n PI %
> S, M " S,M invert. ' S, M omit. ' Before ^, S, M have :|^.
f^.
S,M TJJ. « S, M 1^. ' S, M omit. S, M invert. 'S, M omit.
'
S, M ^ " S, M omit. '"=
S, RI ^. R.
=+ mmm
m> ^ m r^ ^, ^, m 7^ M M ^
fs i$> Ml]
m m m
^, ^ m ^ r^ m ^ P ^
m ^ m m m, m^ a m ^ m m ^
m )^ ^ ^ w Hf n m, ^ m "^ m
n> w m. ^> Wi r^ ^. r^ m
i^ m. s m m, m m ^ b, ^ Pi ^. ft ^
m^'M ^ i^ w ^ m m ^ p if ;g
^ ft i^ p. 7k^ ^, ^
^7^ ffl
m, '^ m.^,^.^ m # ^ m m i>^ itil f|i
^ Yf ft 11, 1^ M ^. m :^ ^ 7> Pf
^ ^ i£^ m j^j A ^' ^.
H ^ *ii!
m -^ M ^ M
m M ^ m'
^ m> ^r m> i^> m ^ m m m B#. n \fn '^t
\^> M ^ m m ^, m m m>
m m m ^ m 'A ^> ^ ^ Si 1^ *E i B,
^Mf it # i. ^, >r ^ s
B^ ^ ^, m> ^ m m a ^ ^' m, ffi
m.m>^m^m m^ a. k. ^ ^ A
m ^ ^ ^ M m:^ m e 1^ K
^^.
^ ft 15 S ±. a A :^ ffi.
m ^^ M ^ M ^ ^
<iii> ^ ^ EE ^, ^î
>S,MP|. ^S, M^.W. 3S;rIC. ^ S

/f ; S, p.y. ^. » S ^.
M :^ f|.
S, ' S, M f^. « S -f^ ; M gjjt • ' S, M omit. '" After
^, S, M insert -j^ " s, M m. w.

J^-y^ + î + M^-Jr 11 +
^, ^ idl itk il ^ Hi
^ ^ n. A f^ -^^ ^ ^ #
m ^ u B^ ^ ^ ii. ^ IS ^ H #, m.
M, &M A ^ ^ Itb Itb ^
jl + .^, M f^ 11 A ^ ^ ^ A
i> X ^ ^ ^ ^ pT ^^ m ^ m
m m. m, ^ A H ^ i
it, ;^ H W ^
it m ^' A. ^ "f-, 1^
^ m M, T # m fto ^
^ m ^ p ^ if tr M m - ig ith it *s*
+ IS ^. A.
^ ^,
> S ^ ^ it
m ^. ft A PH fit
i ^ ^ 1^ ft, i^ m m A
^^ ^ M m TJ m
:^ + ic m. A ¥ ^ P ^ j^ j^
1^ ft Jt # It ill!. ^ M ^
tii ^
1^ ^ ;i o ? ?
^ ^- ^ f^ m
iu # M
fit pT m ^» :! M ? ?
Û HE?
III 75r ^
O W. ^ ib =p-
^.
li^ H
-
^ ^H H ft. ^
5ij Ft a 4
ft =f- ;g ^^ A
itk -fer lil :zr. ^> O î B#.
B#. ft. ®. M m b\u
'
S, M omit. S,J S, M
-+ mmm
Bl, ^0 H Si ^ ^
m ^
m \h A A ^ m ^
m m -m ô m i. A,
^. ^ ¥ % m
m
ifi: 1^ ^. n, ib i f* m
# ^' 11
m it m ft it. i^.
Itb :# ^
f + in ib tl -^
n m f^
:^ ^ m. m ^ "^ M. M m
^ * i^ UJ PI i^r
^. ô m A. i
M M IE
to m m ti IS ^
X w %. sp ^ ^ PI E.
ft ^ ^ H -t tti. m
e
^ ^ ^, A m ^
ii, i^ f* m "^ K
M m ^ ¥ ^ # #. >ii r.
1
S, RI ^. ^ S, M ^. ' The Corean text has the 'xa^ beneath.
* S, M |7g. "> After P , S,M insert |Z9 •

° ' S, M omit. « S, M omit.
B 2
-^ H+
— +
J^
i*» 1^^ rH M m ^ ik
# - -t ^
n- ^. » ^ fi pT * ^
^
^, iii- lis, -t '^ #
tlj ^ H M it ^ ^.
1^ ^. s - ^. w ®^
Ji '^ ^ A. ^ =f- 7t '''TO ft. m. n
iti ra
^ t^ ^ M m. # ;{^ 1^
^ A ^. % m ^ A
-^ m it H ir m m> r^ \^
'& \% i^ ^y ^<. fe lis,
^ ^ # A
±, ^ TV
ffi 1^
^. B. #, ^.
w ^ ? ft
Ml]
m
m-
:s
ft
m
^
m m m n \% ^
J: W fi ^
^ Tl ^
If fjfc A ^
?g ^. ^ •t, M
?i i^ A ft ^ 1^ ^,
T, P
A, la o M-, ^ i^. ^ izg m m ^
til JS B. A m m
'
S, Mg . W. ^ S, ]\I omit. ' S, M omit, and insert ^ :^. ^ After ^, S, M
insert fjff].
» S, M ^. ' After -^^ S, M insert ]g. ' S, I\I ||. ^ S, ]\I omit.
ii -^ —+ fl -+•
m, ^ :^ M ^ m
B, m ;5^ # A P A ^
itb it :^^
;^ ^ ;g ^ ^ -f-.
in jh fe ^
i^. ^ j$
^'j
IP W^ ô m m
fi n A
Kj — m itb y^
)a it M a, -tii.
#ff m o it A. f^
± ^, S N" ^ H ^ ^
m It m A^ #
-t^.
w. ^. p& B ^ ^
ffi # It ^ ^. B#.
ff m m. ^ o ^^
M Vi '^
M 'M ff B#, itk itl^
fP Pi m H
;^
A f 0, n i^
itk
^ ^ 5iJ )g -b m
0. B. m
^^ s, ti J: A IS ^ A.
r^
^ "i^^ M li s
m m 11 i?) 11. A. ;g ^
If t ^ M: 3 *i M *
^ S, M omit. S, M 0. S, M omit. S, M omit. = S, M omit.
B
s+ m% Bm'& »A A
M
-t mmm
if m. i^ itb M. t€
^ ^ M>
4'
i i p:e ± II. m ^ "M
m ft 'M M, iii fi *A^ M, A=
^> ^ M ^ Pi 1^ 7^ ^' :^> in
A ^ ^ ^ ^. ^ ;g it W P^
JUL J^ ffi ^ n ^. ^ ^^ ^
Si f5 *. ^ i: O :! Si ft, S ^, ^. ffl
m ^ u ^ A m 1=- ;J^ W \h' ^ Pi m'

^ M A m. 1^> it ±, ^ ^h ^. € n- ^.
1 JM. + ^. m m ^ m n m - ^ :i^
W< ^ ^> M Z ^,
m> ^ % A m, s B, # ^ ^
^ ^ w if '^Bt, ^ K, ^ ®
* it
51J It t§^ lEo
^ ^ ^)x m. n ^ ^ -M-
^ W, IB, Hi ^ + ii ^ ^ m>m m
^ m m |g 3: •^ T MiJ .# ^, M ^ n
ij^^ :zr. ^ -b ^ 0; ^ fi] m. ^
3t >i^ i^ A 1th
j^ fit jg 0^. f^ fip ^ ^ m ;^

m m -^ If ^)r> M ^ H. J£ ^, H *ili ^f.
m ± ^> il M ;^, ^ ^^ 1^ i
M A, w !^ ^ ji S f^ .If -
itk w ^ ^ ^ - ^J^ X o m
1 ^5 ^> ^ ^ B
' S, M repeat. - M ^.
S, » S, M omit. M ^ S,M repeat.
After |JL(, S, M insert ^. S, M :})|&. ' S, M M. ' S, M omit.
1^
S 0. ^ i, :^ a M. ô H.
3*10 gap
Bra ^. ^, ml H ^ ii> i ^ ft ^
0. .g. ft^ PI f^ Jg jtb €
ft 4 ^ ^ W ^ B, + r.
I' 0,
^ ^ ^ ^ n i
il, Pi 0, B$, Jt ^^' îP, :n B. 0.
^ ft i ^ B. ^ + 1^ II
1^ i5C i^ ^.n m ^ m m
Mi ^, # i M ^ 0. m ^
^' ^ 0f B. :s M ^n, n n s.
^ ft ft; m ftft s ft m ig ra @
H ^ I # ^ # i£. X i 0.
It
[fi ^B ;t. i 0. A ^
fr ^ m ^ ^ M m,
It A ^ li ^
it # # iit^ ^ =f 111.
fit f* ^ g, m- # # îj
ft -i^^ ^ - # # i^t ^. ;{^ ft.

m PI .i,^. .g ^ a$, O ^ ^
i^ m ^ ^ ^ §5 if € H A
m ft
'S.Mji:.^ «
J repeats. ' S, M ;?§ S,M I'l S, IM omit.
« S, p. y. g g|. ' S, M omit. ' S, M omit. ' M ^.

S, ' S, M
" S, M omit. >2 S, M omit. >' S, M omit. S, W omit. S, M omit.
'=
S, IM omit.
1^W ^ ^. :^. i« n
M n m ^ M ^. ^, <# li ^
'^ )S&
m ^> i^ m n - m m w< g. iS A IS ^
M m ^. =- m B M * m H Iff rfn
^
ft M M -t ^ To î f1 ± R ^.
-^^
^. >^ tt. i A ^. ^ M. -^ it 0o
m m p iz> s.. m. ^ i: #. ^, if ^
IS m M. J^ ^ + ^ ^^ i :^ ra ^ ^ a
- ^ M' ^ m m ii ^ 1^ 'ii lift fj^.
pa , I .
A. m m. m ik i^ ^. ^
m ^ ^^ m.m..n #. ^'. ^
M ± i^ ^ ^ m m A # Yt ^ 't ^ A
m M ^ m ^ 7^ m ^ ^ ^ H ft fts ft
A ^ M> W ^ M>. # B#. ff ^ i: m
fS] #f. m ±. ^. n ^. PI ^. # ^. A
^'
fj ^ f^ ^ Yf ^. - tt # m
i[. f^ ft if It. ft ± w ^0 ^.
5ij I?ifc
^ i^ M. -^ A S ^ ^ ^ 0,' n ^
1^ ^. ^ ^. -h ^ M A i ^ p^. ^;f
# A Jl ^ ^. ^ m' #. ^ -t it M'J » #
5i ^ M f^ ^ A. * m
fSj ^ # Yf H m' =^ ^. ^ © 75r m n
^ 4\ 11. t^ S it ^ ^ ^^ i^. ^ ffi
^ O ^ ^. ^ ii n
::*^ ;«^ I 0.
' S, M -|-. ' S, M f^. S, M ^. S, M omit. S, M
m
nj
t^ i: ^ ^t -<H I
tk $^ yj.
ft i^, ^ ^ A ^ W as.
1^ f^ ^ M ^ ^ ^ i ^» 4-^
M, ra ^. # ^^ - m M itb
ft ;^ ^^ ^ ft 4V !^. ^^ s
^ ft 11 n m> ^ ^ >g ^ -f^
^^ A >^ ji ^ 0> m, A. II]
^ i^' K ^ Pi ^
i* @ ^ M. H ffi *^^
f ^ ^. m ^ M ± n
ib H PI.
^
m w ^ !S g
ft. itr, i5«
^ # Jl. ^ m n iJ^^
A # PI It M 0, PI r^ %
^ ^^ M, m, M a ^. *^ M 0. ^ 1^.
f . ^. ^ M ;i ^. i ^. ffi 5IJ
ft 0. ^ ^. iS i5
? ± W> n. ^ M ^ ^ ^ ^
ft ^ ^. ^ & ^ m Hf A, m
it ^ ft W ^:
A, M, ^ ^ # ft ^ ^ Tff
^ O ^ §, ^ î ^ ^ Itk
A ^ ^ ®
A m m i^ >^ .^ ^ #. n. =f-
— ':s tr tr ^ li m ^
'^y-. pjt
'
^M- ' ^' ^^ i'^- ' ^^^^^ @ .
S, M repeat f$ H g . "
S, I\I omit.
» S, M ^. « S, M ^. ' S, M ;^. * S, M omit. ' S, M M.

m n m ?Rr ^ M
m, + m 4^. A !^, ft A ^ ^. i^
u -t m ^ ^ ^ ^. ?t it ^
3. IL,
ft'
m 0. g, ^ m m
m m W(m ± M
% 11, ® ft ^ s ii. ^,
Ml
-n m m "^^ ^ 4b ^ 5^S .||¥
^f-
\>x s. ^, M, M A
m w M'l 5i ^ + M m ^^ ^.m.
M'j m a,
m m m
^ m.^ ^ -^
la:
n m w ^ ^ Mi
- ^ +
^ i: M. fi ^' n, i i>^
^ ^ M ^ ^ ^. n ^
^. i^ m IE
^, iitJ A ± ^ ^ M m m i^ ^^
^ ;^ — ^. m. m n. r.
^ iiii "i* f^ >g M 1A
fi^ \h> ^m ^.
ra ^s ^ ^ ;i s li a
=f- st. m T It 0. gg i&^ ^
m i^ m ^ ^ iJ'^
A :^. ^
ft. 1^ '/rT. , ^, ^. ^,
^ ^ O P. w m gS
yjx jt
/>^ M
>"»
' S, M omit. =>

S, M omit. ' After
"|yf,
S, IVI insert ^. ' S, M
' M
A 2
'^m^mmi^ 1^
#
MW ^
4-
%t
Mr
MINDING SECT. JAN 31^979
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE

CARDS OR SLIPSFROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
DS Fa-hsien
6 A record of Buddhistic
F3 5 kingdoms

Recordofbuddhist 00 Fahsuoft

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Recordofbuddhist 00 Fahsuoft

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Recordofbuddhist 00 Fahsuoft

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FA-HIEN'S RECORD

Oxford University Press Warehouse

Amen Corner, E.C.

RECORD OF BUDDHISTIC KINGDOMS

THE CHINESE MONK FA-HIEN

HIS TRAVELS IN INDIA AND CEYLON

IN SEARCH OF THE BUDDHIST BOOKS OF DISCIPLINE

TRANSLATED AND ANNOTATED

JAMES LEGGE, M.A., LL.D.

From Ch'ang-gan to the Sandy Desert 9

On to Shen-shen and thence to Khoten la

Khoten. Processions of images. The king's New monastery . . 16

and thence to China arrives at Shan-tung and goes to

Nanking. Conclusion or l'envoi by another writer .111

Sketch map of Fa-hien's travels . . . To face Introduction, page i

Dream of Buddha's mother of his incarnation . . . To face p. 65

Buddha just born, with the nagas supplying water to

Buddha tossing the white elephant over the wall . . To face p. 66

Buddha in solitude and enduring austerities . . . To face p. iy

Buddha's death To follow V\\

Several times during my long residence in Hong Kong I endeavoured

was, moreover, so much occupied with my own special labours on the

twice. While preparing my own version I made frequent reference to

augmente d eclaircissements nouveaux par MM. Klaproth et Landresse'

of the highest value, displaying accuracy of Chinese scholarship and an

followed the spelling of Morrison rather than the Pekinese, which is

now in vogue. We cannot tell exactly what the pronunciation of them

required explanation to an English reader. All Chinese texts, and

we entitled to regard the present Sutras as genuine and sufficiently

seems to us) as the time of Fa-hien, and which startle us so frequently

I have referred above, and also in the Introduction, to the Corean

on the whole so much superior to the better-known texts, that I deter-

Scriptures, and then extended so as to be available for printing also the

Confucian Classics ; but a Buddhist work necessarily requires many-

done is owing chiefly to the intelligence, ingenuity, and untiring atten-

Cheh-kiang, and profusely illustrated in the best style of Chinese art.

I am indebted for the use of it to the Rev. J. H. Sedgwick, University

There is no difficulty in laying it down

I. Nothing of great importance is known about Fa-hien in addition

conduct and courage.

trious in the Law,' or '

of Travels in India, by the Sramana of the Eastern Tsin, Fa-hien,

Aut humana parum cavit natura,'

As an instance of his unreliability they refer to his account of the

Much of what Fa-hien tells his readers of Buddhist miracles and

total, 222 millions.'

ii. In his article on M. J. Barthelemy Saint Hilaire's '

still by 455 millions of human beings,' and he appends the

interesting to know which religion counts at the present moment the

place on the scale belongs really to Christianity. It is difficult in

iii. Both these estimates are exceeded by Dr. T. W. Rhys Davids

30 millions of Southern Buddhists, in Ceylon, Burma, Siam, Anam,

nearly '^'>, are assigned to Japan, and 414,686,974 to the

all these estimates, it will be observed that the immense

I am in considerable doubt, excepting in the cases of Ceylon and India ;

period, in one of his famous Sixteen Precepts, exhorted his people to

judgment, and to admit a considerable following of both among the

of these two sentences I would substitute 'nearly all;' and between

RECORD OF BUDDHISTIC KINGDOMS.